ATP Manual

UNITED NATIONS ECONOMIC COMMISSION FOR EUROPE
Inland Transport Committee
ATP ATP Handbook 2021
To be used with the Agreement on the International

Carriage of Perishable Foodstuffs and on the Special
Equipment to be Used for such Carriage (ATP)
as amended on 1 June 2022
UNITED NATIONS ECONOMIC COMMISSION FOR EUROPE
ATP HANDBOOK
2021
United Nations
Geneva, 2021
© 2021 United Nations
All rights reserved worldwide
Requests to reproduce excerpts or to photocopy should be addressed to the Copyright Clearance Center at
copyright.com.
All other queries on rights and licenses, including subsidiary rights, should be addressed to:
United Nations Publications,

405 East 42nd Street, S-09FW001,
New York, NY 10017,
United States of America.
Email: permissions@un.org;
website: https://shop.un.org.
The designations employed and the presentation of material on any map in this work do not imply the expression of any
opinion whatsoever on the part of the United Nations concerning the legal status of any country, territory, city or area or of
its authorities, or concerning the delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries.
United Nations publication issued by the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
ECE/TRANS/312
Sales No. E.21.VIII.4

ISBN 978-92-1-139205-0
eISBN 978-92-1-000131-1
ATP Handbook 2021 iii
PREFACE
1. The ATP Handbook comprises the Agreement itself and its Annexes with comments added where appropriate
for clarification or additional explanation of the text.
2. Comments contained in the ATP Handbook are not legally binding for Contracting Parties of the ATP. They are,
however, important for the interpretation, harmonization and application of the Agreement as they reflect the
opinion of the Working Party on the Transport of Perishable Foodstuffs of the Inland Transport Committee of the
Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE).
3. Comments are placed with the provisions of the Agreement to which they refer.
4. Comments do not modify the provisions of the Agreement or of its Annexes but merely make their contents,
meaning and scope more precise.
5. Comments provide a means of applying the provisions of the Agreement and of its Annexes so as to take
into account the development of technology and economic requirements. They may also describe certain
recommended practices.
iv ATP Handbook 2021
UNITED NATIONS ECONOMIC COMMISSION

FOR EUROPE (UNECE)
The United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) is one of the five United Nations regional commissions,
administered by the Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC). It was established in 1947 with the mandate to help
rebuild post-war Europe, develop economic activity and strengthen economic relations among European countries,
and between Europe and the rest of the world. During the Cold War, UNECE served as a unique forum for economic
dialogue and cooperation between East and West. Despite the complexity of this period, significant achievements
were made, with consensus reached on numerous harmonization and standardization agreements.
In the post-Cold War era, UNECE acquired not only many new member States, but also new functions. Since the
early 1990s the organization has focused on assisting the countries of Central and Eastern Europe, Caucasus and
Central Asia with their transition process and their integration into the global economy.
Today, UNECE supports its 56 member States in Europe, Central Asia and North America in the implementation of
the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development with its Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). UNECE provides a
multilateral platform for policy dialogue, the development of international legal instruments, norms and standards,
the exchange of best practices and economic and technical expertise, as well as technical cooperation for countries
with economies in transition.
Offering practical tools to improve people’s everyday lives in the areas of environment, transport, trade, statistics,
energy, forestry, housing, and land management, many of the norms, standards and conventions developed in
UNECE are used worldwide, and a number of countries from outside the region participate in UNECE’s work.
UNECE’s multisectoral approach helps countries to tackle the interconnected challenges of sustainable development
in an integrated manner, with a transboundary focus that helps devise solutions to shared challenges. With its
unique convening power, UNECE fosters cooperation among all stakeholders at the country and regional levels.
ATP Handbook 2021 v
TRANSPORT IN UNECE
The UNECE Sustainable Transport Division is the secretariat of the Inland Transport Committee (ITC) and the
ECOSOC Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods and on the Globally Harmonized System
of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals. The ITC and its 17 working parties, as well as the ECOSOC Committee
and its sub-committees are intergovernmental decision-making bodies that work to improve the daily lives of
people and businesses around the world, in measurable ways and with concrete actions, to enhance traffic safety,
environmental performance, energy efficiency and the competitiveness of the transport sector.
The ECOSOC Committee was set up in 1953 by the Secretary-General of the United Nations at the request of the
Economic and Social Council to elaborate recommendations on the transport of dangerous goods. Its mandate
was extended to the global (multi-sectoral) harmonization of systems of classification and labelling of chemicals
in 1999. It is composed of experts from countries which possess the relevant expertise and experience in the
international trade and transport of dangerous goods and chemicals. Its membership is restricted in order to reflect
a proper geographical balance between all regions of the world and to ensure adequate participation of developing
countries. Although the Committee is a subsidiary body of ECOSOC, the Secretary-General decided in 1963 that the
secretariat services would be provided by the UNECE Transport Division.
ITC is a unique intergovernmental forum that was set up in 1947 to support the reconstruction of transport
connections in post-war Europe. Over the years, it has specialized in facilitating the harmonized and sustainable
development of inland modes of transport. The main results of this persevering and ongoing work are reflected,
among other things, (i) in 58 United Nations conventions and many more technical regulations, which are updated
on a regular basis and provide an international legal framework for the sustainable development of national and
international road, rail, inland water and intermodal transport, including the transport of dangerous goods, as
well as the construction and inspection of road motor vehicles; (ii) in the Trans-European North-south Motorway,
Trans-European Railway and the Euro-Asia Transport Links projects, that facilitate multi-country coordination of
transport infrastructure investment programmes; (iii) in the TIR system, which is a global customs transit facilitation
solution; (iv) in the tool called For Future Inland Transport Systems (ForFITS), which can assist national and local
governments to monitor carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions coming from inland transport modes and to select and
design climate change mitigation policies, based on their impact and adapted to local conditions; (v) in transport
statistics – methods and data – that are internationally agreed on; (vi) in studies and reports that help transport
policy development by addressing timely issues, based on cutting-edge research and analysis. ITC also devotes
special attention to Intelligent Transport Services (ITS), sustainable urban mobility and city logistics, as well as to
increasing the resilience of transport networks and services in response to climate change adaptation and security
challenges.
In addition, the UNECE Sustainable Transport and Environment Divisions, together with the World Health Organization
(WHO) – Europe, co-service the Transport Health and Environment Pan-European Programme (THE PEP).
Finally, as of 2015, the UNECE Sustainable Transport Division is providing the secretariat services for the Secretary
General’s Special Envoy for Road Safety, Mr. Jean Todt.
ATP Handbook 2021 vii
INTRODUCTION
The Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable Foodstuffs and on the Special Equipment to be Used for
such Carriage (ATP) done at Geneva on 1 September 1970 entered into force on 21 November 1976.
The Agreement and its annexes have been regularly amended and updated since their entry into force by the
Working Party on the Transport of Perishable Foodstuffs (WP.11) of the Economic Commission for Europe’s Inland
Transport Committee.
Territorial applicability
The ATP is an Agreement between States, and there is no overall enforcing authority. In practice, highway checks
are carried out by Contracting Parties, and non-compliance may then result in legal action by national authorities
against offenders in accordance with their domestic legislation. ATP itself does not prescribe any penalties. At the
time of publishing, those Contracting Parties are Albania, Andorra, Austria, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czechia, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Georgia, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Islamic Republic of Iran, Italy, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Monaco, Montenegro,
Morocco, Netherlands, North Macedonia, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Republic of Moldova, Romania, Russian
Federation, San Marino, Saudi Arabia, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Tajikistan, Tunisia, Turkey, Ukraine,
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, United States of America and Uzbekistan.
Additional practical information

Any query concerning the application of ATP should be directed to the relevant competent authority. Additional
information may also be found on the UNECE Sustainable Transport Division web site at the following link:
https://unece.org/text-and-status-agreement
This information, updated on a continuous basis, concerns:
– The status of ATP;
– Depositary notifications (e.g. new Contracting Parties, amendments or corrections to legal

texts);
– Publication details (corrections, publication of new amendments);
– List and details of competent authorities and ATP Test Stations.
The amendments or corrections to the Agreement which have become applicable since the last edition of this
publication are in are in Annex 1, Annex 1 Appendix 1, and in Annex 1, Appendix 2, Model Test Reports of Annex 1
Appendix 2, Annex 1 Appendix 3 and Annex 2 Appendix 1.
viii ATP Handbook 2021
CONTENTS
AGREEMENT ON THE INTERNATIONAL CARRIAGE OF PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS AND

ON THE SPECIAL EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR SUCH CARRIAGE (ATP)............................ 1
Annex 1..................................................................................................................................................... 11
Definitions of and standards for special equipment for the carriage of perishable foodstuffs.... 11
1. Insulated equipment.......................................................................................................................................................11
2. Refrigerated equipment................................................................................................................................................11
3. Mechanically refrigerated equipment..................................................................................................................12
4. Heated equipment...........................................................................................................................................................12
5. Mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment......................................................................................12
6. Transitional measures......................................................................................................................................................13
7. Definitions..............................................................................................................................................................................13
Annex 1, Appendix 1.............................................................................................................................. 14
Provisions relating to the checking of insulated, refrigerated, mechanically refrigerated,

heated or mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment for compliance with the
standards....................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Annex 1, Appendix 2.............................................................................................................................. 20
Methods and procedures for measuring and checking the insulating capacity and the
efficiency of the cooling or heating appliances of special equipment for the carriage of
perishable foodstuffs................................................................................................................................................ 20
1. Definitions and general principles..........................................................................................................................20
2. Insulating capacity of equipment...........................................................................................................................30
3. Effectiveness of thermal appliances of equipment......................................................................................36
4. Procedure for measuring the effective refrigerating capacity Wo of a unit when the
evaporator is free from frost........................................................................................................................................41
5. Checking the insulating capacity of equipment in service.....................................................................47
6. Verifying the effectiveness of thermal appliances of equipment in service.................................48
7. Procedure for measuring the capacity of mechanical multi-temperature refrigeration
units and dimensioning multi-compartment equipment......................................................................52
8. Test Reports...........................................................................................................................................................................57
Models of test reports

MODEL No. 1 A....................................................................................................................................................................58
MODEL No. 1 B....................................................................................................................................................................60
MODEL No. 2 A....................................................................................................................................................................62
MODEL No. 2 B....................................................................................................................................................................64
MODEL No. 3.........................................................................................................................................................................66
MODEL No. 4 A....................................................................................................................................................................67
ATP Handbook 2021 ix
MODEL No. 4 B....................................................................................................................................................................69

MODEL No. 4 C....................................................................................................................................................................72
MODEL No. 5.........................................................................................................................................................................74
MODEL No. 6.........................................................................................................................................................................76
MODEL No. 7.........................................................................................................................................................................78
MODEL No. 8.........................................................................................................................................................................81
MODEL No. 9.........................................................................................................................................................................83
MODEL No. 10......................................................................................................................................................................85
MODEL No. 11......................................................................................................................................................................87
MODEL No. 12......................................................................................................................................................................89
MODEL No. 13......................................................................................................................................................................95
MODEL No. 14......................................................................................................................................................................99
9. Procedure for measuring the capacity of liquefied gas units and dimensioning the
equipment that uses these units.............................................................................................................................101
Annex 1, Appendix 3.............................................................................................................................. 106

A. Model form of certificate of compliance of the equipment, as prescribed in
Annex 1, Appendix 1, paragraph 3.........................................................................................................................106
B. Certification plate of compliance of the equipment, as provided for in Annex 1,
Appendix 1, paragraph 3..............................................................................................................................................109
Annex 1, Appendix 4.............................................................................................................................. 110
Distinguishing marks to be affixed to special equipment.......................................................................... 110
Annex 2..................................................................................................................................................... 112
SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS TO BE OBSERVED FOR THE

CARRIAGE OF QUICK (DEEP)-FROZEN AND FROZEN FOODSTUFFS......................................................... 112
Annex 2, Appendix 1.............................................................................................................................. 113
Monitoring of air temperature for transport of quick-frozen perishable foodstuffs ........................ 113
Annex 2, Appendix 2.............................................................................................................................. 114
Procedure for the sampling and measurement of temperature for carriage

of chilled, frozen and quick-frozen perishable foodstuffs........................................................................... 114
A. General considerations..................................................................................................................................................114
B. Sampling.................................................................................................................................................................................114
C. Temperature measurement of perishable foodstuffs.................................................................................115
D. General specifications for the measuring system.........................................................................................115
E. Allowable tolerances in the measurement of temperature...................................................................116
Annex 3..................................................................................................................................................... 117
SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS

TO BE OBSERVED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF CHILLED FOODSTUFFS........................................................... 117
ATP Handbook 2021 1
AGREEMENT ON THE INTERNATIONAL CARRIAGE OF PERISHABLE

FOODSTUFFS AND ON THE SPECIAL EQUIPMENT TO BE USED
FOR SUCH CARRIAGE (ATP)
THE CONTRACTING PARTIES,
DESIROUS of improving the conditions of preservation of the quality of perishable foodstuffs during their carriage,
particularly in international trade,
CONSIDERING that the improvement of those conditions is likely to promote the expansion of trade in perishable
foodstuffs,
HAVE AGREED as follows:
Chapter I
SPECIAL TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT
Article 1
For the international carriage of perishable foodstuffs, equipment shall not be designated as ‘insulated’, ‘refrigerated’,
‘mechanically refrigerated’, ‘heated’ or ‘mechanically refrigerated and heated’ equipment unless it complies with the
definitions and standards set forth in annex 1 to this Agreement.
Article 2
The Contracting Parties shall take the measures necessary to ensure that the equipment referred to in article 1 of
this Agreement is inspected and tested for compliance with the said standards in conformity with the provisions
of annex 1, appendices 1, 2, 3 and 4, to this Agreement. Each Contracting Party shall recognize the validity of
certificates of compliance issued in conformity with annex 1, appendix 1, paragraph 3 to this Agreement by the
competent authority of another Contracting Party. Each Contracting Party may recognize the validity of certificates
of compliance issued in conformity with the requirements of annex 1, appendices 1 and 2, to this Agreement by the
competent authority of a State not a Contracting Party.
Comment:
The issuing of a certificate of compliance by the competent authorities on the basis of test reports is referred to
in annex 1, appendix 1, paragraph 3, but there is no indication that such reports had to be issued by a testing
station in the country of registration of the equipment.
The test reports in accordance with annex 1, appendix 2 are not certificates. To avoid duplication of the test,
each Contracting Party should recognize test stations from any Contracting Party, approved by the competent
authority of the country concerned.
Contracting Parties may recognize the test reports, issued by testing stations in countries of non-contracting
parties and approved by the competent authority of those countries.
2 ATP Handbook 2021
Chapter II
USE OF SPECIAL TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT FOR THE INTERNATIONAL

CARRIAGE OF CERTAIN PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS
Article 3
1. The provisions of article 4 of this Agreement shall apply to all carriage, whether for hire or reward or for
own account, carried out exclusively subject to the provisions of paragraph 2 of this article by rail, by
road or by a combination of the two, of
– quick (deep)-frozen and frozen foodstuffs, and of

– foodstuffs referred to in annex 3 to this Agreement even if they are neither quick (deep)-frozen nor
frozen,
if the point at which the goods are, or the equipment containing them is, loaded on to a rail or road
vehicle and the point at which the goods are, or the equipment containing them is, unloaded from
that vehicle are in two different States and the point at which the goods are unloaded is situated in the
territory of a Contracting Party.
In the case of carriage entailing one or more sea crossings other than sea crossings as referred to in
paragraph 2 of this article, each land journey shall be considered separately.
2. The provisions of paragraph 1 of this article shall likewise apply to sea crossings of less than 150 km
on condition that the goods are shipped in equipment used for the land journey or journeys without
transloading of the goods and that such crossings precede or follow one or more land journeys as
referred to in paragraph 1 of this article or take place between two such land journeys.
3. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 1 and 2 of this article, the Contracting Parties need not
apply the provisions of article 4 of this Agreement to the carriage of foodstuffs not intended for human
consumption.
Comment:
Except in the case of the sea crossings referred to in article 3, paragraph 2, land/sea/land transport, with
or without reloading of the goods at the end of the sea crossing(s) is not subject to the provisions of the
Agreement if the land transport operations in question are not in themselves of an international nature.
Article 4
1. For the carriage of the perishable foodstuffs specified in annexes 2 and 3 to this Agreement, the equipment
referred to in article 1 of this Agreement shall be used unless the temperatures to be anticipated
throughout carriage render this requirement manifestly unnecessary for the purpose of maintaining
the temperature conditions specified in annexes 2 and 3 to this Agreement. The equipment shall be so
selected and used that the temperature conditions prescribed in the said annexes can be complied with
throughout carriage. Furthermore, all appropriate measures shall be taken, more particularly as regards
the temperature of the foodstuffs at the time of loading and as regards icing or re-icing during the
journey or other necessary operations. Nevertheless, the provisions of this paragraph shall apply only in
so far as they are not incompatible with international undertakings in the matter of international carriage
arising for the Contracting Parties by virtue of conventions in force at the time of the entry into force of
this Agreement or by virtue of conventions substituted for them.
2. If during carriage under this Agreement the provisions of paragraph 1 of this article have not been
complied with,
(a) the foodstuffs may not be disposed of in the territory of a Contracting Party after completion
of carriage unless the competent authorities of that Contracting Party deem it compatible with
the requirements of public health to authorize such disposal and unless such conditions as the
authorities may attach to the authorization when granting it are fulfilled; and
ATP Handbook 2021 3
(b) every Contracting Party may, by reason of the requirements of public health or zooprophylaxis and
in so far as it is not incompatible with the other international undertakings referred to in the last
sentence of paragraph 1 of this article, prohibit the entry of the foodstuffs into its territory or make
their entry subject to such conditions as it may determine.
3. Compliance with the provisions of paragraph 1 of this article shall be required of carriers for hire or reward
only in so far as they have undertaken to procure or provide services intended to ensure such compliance
and if such compliance depends on the performance of those services. If other persons, whether
individuals or corporate bodies, have undertaken to procure or provide services intended to ensure
compliance with the provisions of this Agreement, they shall be required to ensure such compliance in
so far as it depends on performance of the services they have undertaken to procure or provide.
4. During carriage which is subject to the provisions of this Agreement and for which the loading point is
situated in the territory of a Contracting Party, responsibility for compliance with the requirements of
paragraph 1 of this article shall rest, subject to the provisions of paragraph 3 of this article,
– in the case of transport for hire or reward, with the person, whether an individual or a corporate
body, who is the consignor according to the transport document or, in the absence of a transport
document, with the person, whether an individual or a corporate body, who has entered into the
contract of carriage with the carrier;
– in other cases with the person, whether an individual or a corporate body, who performs carriage.
Comment:
For packages and cargo transport units containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when
used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid
(UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen, see section 5.5.3 of the International
Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code), the Regulations concerning the International Carriage
of Dangerous Goods by Rail (RID) and the Agreement concerning the International Carriage of
Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
Chapter III
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
Article 5
The provisions of this Agreement shall not apply to carriage in containers classified as thermal maritime by land
without transloading of the goods where such carriage is preceded or followed by a sea crossing other than a sea
crossing as referred to in article 3, paragraph 2, of this Agreement.
Comment:
Land transport by container classified as a thermal maritime ISO-1496-2 container or container conforming
to an equivalent standard, approved by the competent authority of an ATP Contracting Party, preceded or
followed by one or more sea crossings, other than those referred to in article 3, paragraph 2, is not subject to
the provisions of the Agreement.
Article 6
1. Each Contracting Party shall take all appropriate measures to ensure observance of the provisions of this
Agreement. The competent administrations of the Contracting Parties shall keep one another informed
of the general measures taken for this purpose.
2. If a Contracting Party discovers a breach committed by a person residing in the territory of another
Contracting Party, or imposes a penalty upon such a person, the administration of the first Party shall
inform the administration of the other Party of the breach discovered and of the penalty imposed.
4 ATP Handbook 2021
Comment:
QUESTIONNAIRE FOR COLLECTION OF STATISTICS
ON CHECKS CARRIED OUT TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH THE ATP
Name of Country Date/Year
1. Number of checks made Road equipment checks: …………………………….
under Article 6 of ATP: Railway equipment checks: …………………………….
Total: …………………………….
2. Number of detected breaches Equipment registered in foreign countries4

Domestically registered equipment
Number of breaches Number of breaches
of ATP documents1: ……………………………. of ATP documents1: …………………………….
Number of breaches Number of breaches related

related to thermal to thermal appliances:
appliances: ……………………………. …………………………….
Number of breaches related
Number of breaches to the body 2
related to the body 2 ……………………………. …………………………….
Other ATP breaches3:
Other ATP breaches3: ……………………………. …………………………….
Total breaches:
Total breaches: ……………………………. …………………………….
3. Percentage of defective equipment: ………………

4. Additional information on compliance with the ATP
Number of 1st certificates issued: (new equipment only) …………………………….
Number of 2nd certificates issued: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

(based on K values by test stations) …………………………….
Number of 3rd certificates issued: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

Number of 4th certificates: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

Number of 5th and following certificates: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

Total ATP certificates issued:

Total duplicate certificates issued:
Notes:
1
Including ATP plates and manufacturer’s plates (Annex 1, Appendix 1, paragraph 6).
2
Seals damaged, holes or cracks.
3
Temperature recorder missing, or other.
4
This information shall be sent in accordance with Article 6, paragraph 2.
Signature of the competent authority
Article 7
The Contracting Parties reserve the right to enter into bilateral or multilateral agreements to the effect that provisions
applicable to special equipment and provisions applicable to the temperatures at which certain foodstuffs are
required to be maintained during carriage may, more particularly by reason of special climatic conditions, be
more stringent than those prescribed in this Agreement. Such provisions shall apply only to international carriage
between Contracting Parties which have concluded bilateral or multilateral agreements as referred to in this article.
Such agreements shall be transmitted to the Secretary-General of the United Nations, who shall communicate them
to Contracting Parties to this Agreement which are not signatories of the said agreements.
ATP Handbook 2021 5
Article 8
Failure to observe the provisions of this Agreement shall not affect either the existence or the validity of contracts
entered into for the performance of carriage.
Chapter IV
FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 9
1. States members of the Economic Commission for Europe and States admitted to the Commission in a
consultative capacity under paragraph 8 of the Commission’s terms of reference may become Contracting
Parties to this Agreement
(a) by signing it;
(b) by ratifying it after signing it subject to ratification; or
(c) by acceding to it.
2. States which may participate in certain activities of the Economic Commission for Europe under
paragraph 11 of the Commission’s terms of reference may become Contracting Parties to this Agreement
by acceding thereto after its entry into force.
3. This Agreement shall be open for signature until 31 May 1971 inclusive. Thereafter, it shall be open for
accession.
4. Ratification or accession shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument with the Secretary-General of
the United Nations.
Comments:
0.9-1 Signature subject to ratification, acceptance or approval
Where the signature is subject to ratification, acceptance or approval, the signature does not establish
the consent to be bound. However, it is a means of authentication and expresses the willingness of the
signatory state to continue the treaty-making process. The signature qualifies the signatory state to
proceed to ratification, acceptance or approval. It also creates an obligation to refrain, in good faith,
from acts that would defeat the object and the purpose of the treaty.
0.9-2 Ratification
Ratification defines the international act whereby a state indicates its consent to be bound to a treaty
if the parties intended to show their consent by such an act. In the case of bilateral treaties, ratification
is usually accomplished by exchanging the requisite instruments, while in the case of multilateral
treaties the usual procedure is for the depository to collect the ratifications of all states, keeping all
parties informed of the situation. The institution of ratification grants states the necessary time-frame
to seek the required approval for the treaty on the domestic level and to enact the necessary legislation
to give domestic effect to that treaty.
0.9-3 Accession
“Accession” is the act whereby a state accepts the offer or the opportunity to become a party to a treaty
already negotiated and signed by other states. It has the same legal effect as ratification. Accession
usually occurs after the treaty has entered into force.
6 ATP Handbook 2021
Article 10
1. Any State may at the time of signing this Agreement without reservation as to ratification or of depositing
its instrument of ratification or accession or at any time thereafter declare by notification addressed to
the Secretary-General of the United Nations that the Agreement does not apply to carriage performed in
any or in a particular one of its territories situated outside Europe. If notification as aforesaid is made after
the entry into force of the Agreement in respect of the notifying State the Agreement shall, ninety days
after the date on which the Secretary-General has received the notification, cease to apply to carriage
in the territory or territories named in that notification. New Contracting Parties acceding to ATP as from
30 April 1999 and applying paragraph 1 of this article shall not be entitled to enter any objection to draft
amendments in accordance with the procedure provided for in article 18, paragraph 2.
2. Any State which has made a declaration under paragraph 1 of this article may at any time thereafter
declare by notification addressed to the Secretary-General of the United Nations that the Agreement
will be applicable to carriage performed in a territory named in the notification made under paragraph 1
of this article and the Agreement shall become applicable to carriage in that territory one hundred and
eighty days after the date on which the Secretary-General has received that notification.
Comments:
0.10-1 Notification
The term “notification” refers to a formality through which a State or an international organisation
communicates certain facts or events of legal importance. Notification is increasingly resorted to as a
means of expressing final consent. Instead of opting for the exchange of documents or deposit, States
may be content to notify their consent to the other party or to the depository. However, all other acts
and instruments relating to the life of a treaty may also call for notifications.
0.10-2 Declarations
Sometimes States make “declarations” as to their understanding of some matter or as to the
interpretation of a particular provision. Unlike reservations, declarations merely clarify the state’s
position and do not purport to exclude or modify the legal effect of a treaty. Usually, declarations are
made at the time of the deposit of the corresponding instrument or at the time of signature.
Article 11
1. This Agreement shall come into force one year after five of the States referred to in its article 9, paragraph 1,
have signed it without reservation as to ratification or have deposited their instruments of ratification or
accession.
2. With respect to any State which ratifies, or accedes to, this Agreement after five States have signed it
without reservation as to ratification or have deposited their instruments of ratification or accession, this
Agreement shall enter into force one year after the said State has deposited its instrument of ratification
or accession.
Article 12
1. Any Contracting Party may denounce this Agreement by giving notice of denunciation to the Secretary-
General of the United Nations.
2. The denunciation shall take effect fifteen months after the date on which the Secretary-General received
the notice of denunciation.
Article 13
This Agreement shall cease to have effect if the number of Contracting Parties is less than five throughout any
period of twelve consecutive months after its entry into force.
ATP Handbook 2021 7
Article 14
1. Any State may at the time of signing this Agreement without reservation as to ratification or of depositing
its instrument of ratification or accession or at any time thereafter declare by notification addressed to the
Secretary-General of the United Nations that this Agreement will be applicable to all or any of the territories
for the international relations of which that State is responsible. This Agreement shall be applicable to the
territory or territories named in the notification as from the ninetieth day after receipt of the notice by the
Secretary-General or, if on that day the Agreement has not yet entered into force, as from its entry into force.
2. Any State which has made a declaration under paragraph 1 of this article making this Agreement
applicable to a territory for whose international relations it is responsible may denounce the Agreement
separately in respect of that territory in conformity with article 12 hereof.
Article 15
1. Any dispute between two or more Contracting Parties concerning the interpretation or application of
this Agreement shall so far as possible be settled by negotiation between them.
2. Any dispute which is not settled by negotiation shall be submitted to arbitration if any one of the
Contracting Parties concerned in the dispute so requests and shall be referred accordingly to one or
more arbitrators selected by agreement between those Parties. If within three months from the date of
the request for arbitration, the Parties concerned in the dispute are unable to agree on the selection of
an arbitrator or arbitrators, any of those Parties may request the Secretary-General of the United Nations
to designate a single arbitrator to whom the dispute shall be referred for decision.
3. The decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators designated under the preceding paragraph shall be binding
on the Contracting Parties concerned in the dispute.
Article 16
1. Any State may, at the time of signing, ratifying, or acceding to, this Agreement, declare that it does not consider
itself bound by article 15, paragraphs 2 and 3 of this Agreement. The other Contracting Parties shall not be
bound by these paragraphs with respect to any Contracting Party which has entered such a reservation.
2. Any Contracting Party which has entered a reservation under paragraph 1 of this article may at any time
withdraw the reservation by notification addressed to the Secretary-General of the United Nations.
3. With the exception of the reservation provided for in paragraph 1 of this article, no reservation to this
Agreement shall be permitted.
Comment:
0.16-1 Reservation
A reservation is a declaration made by a State by which it purports to exclude or alter the legal effect
of certain provisions of the treaty in their application to that state. A reservation enables a State to
accept a multilateral treaty as a whole by giving it the possibility not to apply certain provisions
with which it does not want to comply. Reservations can be made when the treaty is signed, ratified,
accepted, approved or acceded to. Reservations must not be incompatible with the object and the
purpose of the treaty. Furthermore, a treaty might prohibit reservations or only allow for certain
reservations to be made.
Article 17
1. After this Agreement has been in force for three years, any Contracting Party may, by notification
addressed to the Secretary-General of the United Nations, request that a conference be convened for
the purpose of revising this Agreement. The Secretary-General shall notify all Contracting Parties of the
request and a revision conference shall be convened by the Secretary-General if, within a period of four
months from the date of the notification sent by the Secretary-General, not less than one third of the
Contracting Parties signify their assent to the request.
8 ATP Handbook 2021
2. If a conference is convened in pursuance of paragraph 1 of this article, the Secretary-General shall so

advise all the Contracting Parties and invite them to submit within a period of three months, the proposals
which they wish the conference to consider. The Secretary-General shall circulate the provisional agenda
for the conference, together with the text of such proposals, to all Contracting Parties not less than three
months before the date on which the conference is to open.
3. The Secretary-General shall invite to any conference convened in pursuance of this article all the countries
referred to in article 9, paragraph 1, of this Agreement, and also the countries which have become
Contracting Parties under the said article 9, paragraph 2.
Comment:
0.17-1 Revision
Some treaties provide for a revision additional to an amendment (i.e., Article 109 of the Charter of
the United Nations). In that case, the term “revision” refers to an overriding adoption of the treaty
to changed circumstances, whereas the term “amendment” refers only to a change of singular
provisions.
Article 18
1. Any Contracting Party may propose one or more amendments to this Agreement. The text of any
proposed amendment shall be communicated to the Secretary-General of the United Nations, who shall
communicate it to all Contracting Parties and bring it to the notice of all the other States referred to in
article 9, paragraph 1, of this Agreement.
The Secretary-General may also propose amendments to this Agreement or to its annexes which have
been transmitted to him by the Working Party on the Transport of Perishable Foodstuffs of the Inland
Transport Committee of the Economic Commission for Europe.
2. Within a period of six months following the date on which the proposed amendment is communicated
by the Secretary-General, any Contracting Party may inform the Secretary-General
(a) that it has an objection to the amendment proposed, or

(b) that, although it intends to accept the proposal, the conditions necessary for such acceptance are
not yet fulfilled in its country.
3. If a Contracting Party sends the Secretary-General a communication as provided for in paragraph 2 (b)
of this article, it may, so long as it has not notified the Secretary-General of its acceptance, submit an
objection to the proposed amendment within a period of nine months following the expiry of the period
of six months prescribed in respect of the initial communication.
4. If an objection to the proposed amendment is stated in accordance with the terms of paragraphs 2 and
3 of this article, the amendment shall be deemed not to have been accepted and shall be of no effect.
5. If no objection to the proposed amendment has been stated in accordance with paragraphs 2 and 3 of
this article, the amendment shall be deemed to have been accepted on the date specified below:
(a) if no Contracting Party has sent a communication to the Secretary-General in accordance with
paragraph 2 (b) of this article, on the expiry of the period of six months referred to in paragraph 2
of this article;
(b) if at least one Contracting Party has sent a communication to the Secretary-General in accordance
with paragraph 2 (b) of this article, on the earlier of the following two dates:
– the date by which all the Contracting Parties which sent such communications have notified
the Secretary-General of their acceptance of the proposed amendment, subject however to the
proviso that if all the acceptances were notified before the expiry of the period of six months
referred to in paragraph 2 of this article the date shall be the date of expiry of that period;
ATP Handbook 2021 9
– the date of expiry of the period of nine months referred to in paragraph 3 of this article.
6. Any amendment deemed to be accepted shall enter into force six months after the date on which it was
deemed to be accepted.
7. The Secretary-General shall as soon as possible inform all Contracting Parties whether an objection
to the proposed amendment has been stated in accordance with paragraph 2 (a) of this article
and whether one or more Contracting Parties have sent him a communication in accordance with
paragraph 2 (b) of this article. If one or more Contracting Parties have sent him such a communication,
he shall subsequently inform all the Contracting Parties whether the Contracting Party or Parties which
have sent such a communication raise an objection to the proposed amendment or accept it.
8. Independently of the amendment procedure laid down in paragraphs 1 to 6 of this article, the
annexes and appendices to this Agreement may be modified by agreement between the competent
administrations of all the Contracting Parties. If the administration of a Contracting Party has stated
that under its national law its agreement is contingent on special authorization or on the approval of
a legislative body, the consent of the Contracting Party concerned to the modification of an annex
shall not be deemed to have been given until the Contracting Party has notified the Secretary-
General that the necessary authorization or approval has been obtained. The agreement between
the competent administrations may provide that, during a transitional period, the old annexes shall
remain in force, wholly or in part, concurrently with the new annexes. The Secretary-General shall
specify the date of the entry into force of the new texts resulting from such modifications.
Comments:
0.18-1 Amendment
The term “amendment” refers to the formal alteration of treaty provisions affecting all the parties to
the particular agreement. Such alterations must be effected with the same formalities that attended the
original formation of the treaty. Many multilateral treaties lay down specific requirements to be satisfied
for amendments to be adopted. In the absence of such provisions, amendments require the consent of
all the Parties.
0.18-2 Correction of errors
If, after the authentication of a text, the signatory and Contracting States are agreed that
it contains an error, it can be corrected by initialling the corrected treaty text, by executing or
exchanging an instrument containing the correction or by executing the corrected text of the
whole treaty by the same procedure as in the case of the original text. If there is a depository, the
depository must communicate the proposed corrections to all signatory and contracting states.
In the UN practice, the Secretary-General, in his function as depository, informs all Parties to a
treaty of the errors and the proposal to correct it. If, on the expiry of an appropriate time-limit, no
objections are raised by the signatory and Contracting States, the depository circulates a process-
verbal of rectification and causes the corrections to be effected in the authentic text(s).
Article 19
In addition to communicating to them the notifications provided for in articles 17 and 18 of this Agreement, the
Secretary-General of the United Nations shall notify the States referred to in article 9, paragraph 1, of this Agreement
and the States which have become Contracting Parties under article 9, paragraph 2, of:
(a) signatures, ratifications and accessions under article 9;
(b) the dates of entry into force of this Agreement pursuant to article 11;
(c) denunciations under article 12;
(d) the termination of this Agreement under article 13;

10 ATP Handbook 2021
(e) notifications received under articles 10 and 14;
(f) declarations and notifications received under article 16, paragraphs 1 and 2;
(g) the entry into force of any amendment pursuant to article 18.
Article 20
After 31 May 1971, the original of this Agreement shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the United Nations,
who shall transmit certified true copies to each of the States mentioned in article 9, paragraphs 1 and 2, of this
Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned, being duly authorized thereto, have signed this Agreement.
DONE at Geneva, this first day of September, one thousand nine hundred and seventy, in a single copy, in the
English, French and Russian languages, the three texts being equally authentic.
ATP Handbook 2021 11
Annex 1
DEFINITIONS OF AND STANDARDS FOR
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 1 FOR THE CARRIAGE
OF PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS
1.
Insulated equipment. Equipment of which the body 2 is built with rigid* insulating walls, doors, floor
and roof, by which heat exchanges between the inside and outside of the body can be so limited that the
overall coefficient of heat transfer (K coefficient) is such that the equipment is assignable to one or other
of the following two categories:
IN = Normally insulated equipment specified by: – a K coefficient equal to or less than 0.70 W/m2.°C;
IR = Heavily insulated equipment specified by: – a K coefficient equal to or less than 0.40 W/m2.°C
and by side-walls with a thickness of at least
45 mm for transport equipment of a width
greater than 2.50 m.
The definition of the K coefficient and a description of the method to be used in measuring it are given
in appendix 2 to this annex.
2.
Refrigerated equipment. Insulated equipment which, using a source of cold (natural ice, with or
without the addition of salt; eutectic plates; dry ice, with or without sublimation control; liquefied gases,
with or without evaporation control, etc.) other than a mechanical or “absorption” unit, is capable, with
a mean outside temperature of + 30 °C, of lowering the temperature inside the empty body to, and
thereafter maintaining it:
At + 7 °C maximum in the case of class A;
At -10 °C maximum in the case of class B;
At -20 °C maximum in the case of class C; and
At 0 °C maximum in the case of class D.
If such equipment includes one or more compartments, receptacles or tanks for the refrigerant, the said
compartments, receptacles or tanks shall:
be capable of being filled or refilled from the outside; and
have a capacity in conformity with the provisions of annex l, appendix 2, paragraph 3.1.3.
The K coefficient of refrigerated equipment of classes B and C shall in every case be equal to or less than
0.40 W/m2.°C.
1
Wagons, lorries, trailers, semi trailers, containers and other similar equipment.
2
In the case of tank equipment, the term “body” means under this definition, the tank itself.
*
Rigid in this case refers to non-flexible continuous or non-continuous surfaces, for example full solid walls or roller-shutter doors.
3. Mechanically refrigerated equipment. Insulated equipment either fitted with its own refrigerating
appliance, or served jointly with other units of transport equipment by such an appliance (fitted with
either a mechanical compressor, or an “absorption” device, etc.). The appliance shall be capable,
with a mean outside temperature of + 30 °C, of lowering the temperature Ti inside the empty body
to, and thereafter maintaining it continuously in the following manner at:
In the case of classes A, B and C, any desired practically constant inside temperature Ti in conformity with
the standards defined below for the three classes:
Class A. Mechanically refrigerated equipment fitted with a refrigerating appliance such that Ti may be
chosen between + 12 °C and 0 °C inclusive;
Class B. Mechanically refrigerated equipment fitted with a refrigerating appliance such that Ti may be
chosen between + 12 °C and -10 °C inclusive;
Class C. Mechanically refrigerated equipment fitted with a refrigerating appliance such that Ti may be
chosen between + 12 °C and -20 °C inclusive.
In the case of classes D, E and F a fixed practically constant inside temperature Ti in conformity with the
standards defined below for the three classes:
Class D. Mechanically refrigerated equipment fitted with a refrigerating appliance such that Ti is equal
to or less than 0 °C;
Class E. Mechanically refrigerated equipment fitted with a refrigerating appliance such that Ti is equal
to or less than -10 °C;
Class F. Mechanically refrigerated equipment fitted with a refrigerating appliance such that Ti is equal
to or less than -20 °C. The K coefficient of equipment of classes B, C, E and F shall in every case be
equal to or less than 0.40 W/m2.°C.
4. Heated equipment. Insulated equipment, which is capable of raising the inside temperature of the
empty body to, and thereafter maintaining it for not less than 12 hours without renewal of supply at, a
practically constant value of not less than + 12 °C when the mean outside temperature, is as
indicated below:
-10 °C in the case of class A heated equipment;

-20 °C in the case of class B heated equipment;
-30 °C in the case of class C heated equipment;
-40 °C in the case of class D heated equipment.
Heat producing appliances shall have a capacity in conformity with the provisions of annex 1, appendix
2, paragraphs 3.3.1 to 3.3.5.
The K coefficient of equipment of classes B, C and D shall in every case be equal to or less than 0.40 W/m2.°C.
5.
Mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment. Insulated equipment either fitted with its own
refrigerating appliance, or served jointly with other units of transport equipment by such an appliance
(fitted with either a mechanical compressor, or an ‘absorption’ device, etc.), and heating (fitted with
electric heaters, etc.) or refrigerating-heating units capable both of lowering the temperature Ti inside
the empty body and thereafter maintaining it continuously, and of raising the temperature and thereafter
maintaining it for not less than 12 hours without renewal of supply at a practically constant value, as
indicated below.
Class A: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and 0 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-10 °C and +30 °C.
Class B: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and 0 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-20 °C and +30 °C.
Class C: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and 0 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-30 °C and +30 °C.
Class D: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and 0 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-40 °C and +30 °C.
Class E: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -10 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-10 °C and +30 °C.
Class F: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -10 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-20 °C and +30 °C.
Class G: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -10 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-30 °C and +30 °C.
Class H: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -10 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-40 °C and +30 °C.
Class I: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -20 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-10 °C and +30 °C.
Class J: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -20 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-20 °C and +30 °C.
Class K: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -20 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-30 °C and +30 °C.
Class L: Ti may be chosen between + 12 °C and -20 °C inclusive at a mean outside temperature between
-40 °C and +30 °C.
The K coefficient of equipment of classes B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K and L shall in every case be equal to or

less than 0.40 W/m².°C.
Heat producing or refrigerating-heating appliances when in heating mode shall have a capacity in
conformity with the provisions of annex 1, appendix 2, paragraphs 3.4.1 to 3.4.5.
6. Transitional measures
6.1 Insulated bodies with non-rigid walls which first came into service before the amendment of paragraph 1
of annex 1 entered into force on 6 January 2018 may continue to be used for the carriage of perishable
foodstuffs of the appropriate classification until the validity of the certificate of compliance expires.
The validity of the certificate shall not be extended.
7. Definitions
Equipment means an assembly of parts forming an insulated body and its supportive structure needed
for carriage on road and rail. Thermal appliances may be part of the assembly.
Heating appliance means a thermal appliance that generates thermal energy to increase(heat) the
temperature inside.
Mechanically heated and refrigerated appliance means a mechanical refrigerating appliance that is able to
decrease (cool) or increase (heat) the temperature inside the equipment that is tested to certify both the
capacity to cool and to heat.
Mechanically refrigerating appliance means a thermal appliance that generates thermal energy to decrease
(cool) the temperature inside the equipment by a mechanical drive system.
Refrigerating appliance means a thermal appliance that generates thermal energy to decrease (cool) the
temperature inside the equipment by melting, evaporation or sublimation of for example natural ice,
brine (eutectic) liquefied gas or dry ice.
Thermal appliance means a device to generate thermal energy, to decrease (cool) or increase (heat) the
temperature inside the equipment.
Annex 1, Appendix 1
PROVISIONS RELATING TO THE CHECKING OF
INSULATED, REFRIGERATED, MECHANICALLY REFRIGERATED,
HEATED OR MECHANICALLY REFRIGERATED AND HEATED
EQUIPMENT FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE STANDARDS
1. Checks for conformity with the standards prescribed in this annex shall be made:
(a) before equipment enters into service;
(b) periodically, at least once every six years; and
(c) whenever required by the competent authority.
Except in the cases provided for in appendix 2, sections 5 and 6, to this annex, the checks shall be made
at a testing station designated or approved by the competent authority of the country in which the
equipment is registered or recorded, unless, in the case of the check referred to in (a) above, a check
has already been made on the equipment itself or on its prototype in a testing station designated or
approved by the competent authority of the country in which the equipment was manufactured.
Comment:
This provision therefore means that the check must be carried out at a testing station designated
or approved by the competent authority of the country in which the equipment is registered. If the
equipment cannot be registered, the check shall be carried out in the country where the equipment is
recorded.
Accordingly, the word ‘or’ does not signify a choice. It means that if the equipment is such that it cannot be
registered (e.g. a container), then it must be recorded in the country where the owner of the equipment is based.
This comment applies also to the other provisions containing the words ‘registered or recorded’.
2. The methods and procedures to be used in checking for compliance with the standards are described in
appendix 2 to this annex.
3. A certificate of compliance with the standards shall be issued by the competent authority of the country
in which the equipment is to be registered or recorded. This certificate shall conform to the model
reproduced in appendix 3 to this annex.
The certificate of compliance shall be carried on the equipment during carriage and be produced whenever
so required by the control authorities. However, if a certification plate of compliance, as reproduced in
appendix 3 to this annex, is fixed to the equipment, the certification plate of compliance shall be recognized
as equivalent to a certificate of compliance. A certification plate of compliance may be fixed to the equipment
only when a valid certificate of compliance is available. Certification plates of compliance shall be removed
as soon as the equipment ceases to conform to the standards laid down in this annex.
In the case of equipment transferred to another country, which is a Contracting Party to ATP, it shall be
accompanied by the following documents so that the competent authority of the country in which the
equipment is to be registered or recorded can issue a certificate of compliance:
(a) in all cases, the test report of the equipment itself or, in the case of serially produced equipment, of
the reference equipment;
(b) in all cases, the certificate of compliance issued by the competent authority of the country of
manufacture or, for equipment in service, the competent authority of the country of registration.
This certificate will be treated as a provisional certificate if necessary with a maximum validity of six
months. For Multi Temperature, Multi Compartment equipment also the declaration of conformity
(see 7.3.6 of annex I, appendix 2) shall be provided;
(c) in the case of serially produced equipment, the technical specification of the equipment to be
certified as issued by the manufacturer of the equipment or his duly accredited representative
(this specification shall cover the same items as the descriptive pages concerning the equipment
which appear in the test report and shall be drawn up in at least one of the official languages). For
Multi Temperature, Multi Compartment equipment also a calculation sheet (see 7.3.6 of annex I,
appendix 2) based on the iterative method shall be provided.
In the case of equipment transferred after it has been in use, the equipment may be subject to a visual
inspection to confirm its identity before the competent authority of the country, in which it is to be
registered or recorded, issues a certificate of compliance.
For a batch of identical serially produced insulated equipment (containers) having an internal volume of
less than 2 m3, a certificate of compliance for the batch may be issued by the competent authority. In such
cases the identification numbers of all the insulated equipment, or the first and the last identification
numbers of the series, shall be indicated on the certificate of compliance instead of the serial number of
each individual unit. In that case, the insulated equipment listed in that certificate shall be fitted with a
certification plate of compliance as described in Annex 1, Appendix 3 B issued by the competent authority.
In the case of transfer of this insulated equipment (containers) to another country which is a Contracting
Party to this Agreement in order to be registered or recorded there, the competent authority of the
country of the new registration or recording may provide an individual certificate of compliance based
on the original certificate of compliance established for the whole batch.
Comments to paragraph 3 (c):

While the model ATP certificate is clearly defined in this paragraph, the applications for approval differ
from one country to another. It would therefore be useful for a single format to be proposed for all
Contracting Parties.
The test report could be drawn up in the national language of the country reissuing the document.
It should also be drawn up in at least one of the three official languages of ATP.
4. Distinguishing marks and particulars shall be affixed to the equipment in conformity with the provisions
of appendix 4 to this annex. They shall be removed as soon as the equipment ceases to conform to the
standards laid down in this annex.
5. The insulated bodies of ‘insulated’, ‘refrigerated’, ‘mechanically refrigerated’, ‘heated’ or ‘mechanically

refrigerated and heated’ transport equipment and their thermal appliances shall each bear a durable
manufacturer’s plate firmly affixed by the manufacturer in a conspicuous and readily accessible position
on a part not subject to replacement in use. It shall be able to be checked easily and without the
use of tools. For insulated bodies, the manufacturer’s plate shall be on the outside of the body. The
manufacturer’s plate shall show clearly and indelibly at least the following particulars:3
Country of manufacture or letters used in international road traffic;
Name of manufacturer or company;
Model (figures and/or letters);
Serial number;
Month and year of manufacture.
3
These requirements shall apply to new plates only. A transitional period of three months shall be granted from the date of entry into force of this
requirement.
Comment: ATP checklist:

The ATP checklist which appears at the end of this publication in the Section on Examples of Good Practice
may serve as guidelines for verifying transport equipment used for the road transport of perishable foodstuffs.
The ATP checklist includes basic information regarding the inspection of the isothermal properties of road
transport equipment (certificate, certification plate, manufacturer’s plate etc.) and the monitoring of air
temperatures of quick-frozen perishable foodstuffs. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/220, para. 39)
6. (a) ew equipment of a specific type serially produced may be approved by testing one unit of that
N
type. If the unit tested meets the class specification, the resulting test report shall be regarded as a
Type Approval Certificate. This certificate shall expire at the end of a period of six years beginning
from the date of completion of the test.
The date of expiry of test reports shall be stated in months and years.
Comment to paragraph 6 (a):

A test report is valid for six years as from the date of the finalisation of the test.
(b) The competent authority shall take steps to verify that production of other units is in conformity
with the approved type. For this purpose it may check by testing sample units drawn at random
from the production series.
(c) A unit shall not be regarded as being of the same type as the unit tested unless it satisfies the
following minimum conditions:
(i) If it is insulated equipment, in which case the reference equipment may be insulated, refrigerated,
mechanically refrigerated, heated or mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment,
the construction shall be comparable and, in particular, the insulating material and the method
of insulation shall be identical;
Comment 1.1: Different types of equipment, e.g. trailers, semitrailers, may be considered
as of comparable construction, if other conditions in annex 1, appendix 1, paragraph 6 (c) (i)
are satisfied.
Comment 1.2: Using different surface materials compared to the reference equipment is
allowed, if thickness of the insulating materials is not reduced and if changing the surface
material does not reduce the insulating capacity of the body.
Comment Recessed interior and exterior fittings mentioned in a test report count as a
reduction in the volume of insulating material, and the sum of these volumes may be used
for any other minor modifications no matter where they are situated in the unit, as long as
the following conditions are met:
• the thickness of the remaining insulation material is not less than that of the tested
reference equipment at the locations of the fittings; and
• the minimum thickness of the remaining insulation material may be locally reduced but
shall be at least 20mm.
In case of modifications, screwed fittings shall be carried out so as to prevent the occurrence
of humidity and icing of the modified components. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/228, para. 68)
the thickness of the insulating material shall be not less than that of the reference equipment;
Comment 2.1: Reducing in some parts of the body the thickness of the insulating material,
compared to the reference equipment, and compensating the change by increasing the
thickness of the insulating material in some other parts of the body, is not allowed.
the interior fittings shall be identical or simplified;
the number of doors and the number of hatches or other openings shall be the same or less;
and
the inside surface area of the body shall not be as much as 20% greater or smaller;
minor and limited modifications of added or exchanged interior and exterior fittings may be
permitted:4
Comment 1: “Minor and limited modifications” in this context mean added accessories like
load securing rails, wheel arches, lamps etc. which reduce locally the amount and thickness
of the insulating material compared to the reference equipment. Reducing the insulating
thickness overall, like a whole wall or door, shall not be regarded as minor and limited
modifications.
– if the equivalent volume of accumulated insulation material of all such modifications is

less than 1/100th of the total volume of the insulating material in the insulated unit;
Comment 2: The total volume of the insulating material shall be calculated by

the test station and stated on the test report as the “total reference volume of the
insulating material”. It shall be the outside volume of the insulated body from which
the thicknesses of the outside surface materials are subtracted minus the inside volume
of the insulated body to which the thicknesses of inside surface materials are added.
If the inside surface area of the serially produced equipment differs from the reference
equipment by not more than 20%, the total volume of the insulating material, from
which the 1/100th is calculated, shall be corrected by the same percentage.
– if the K coefficient of the tested reference equipment, corrected by a calculation of the

added thermal losses, is less than or equal to the K coefficient limit of the category of the
equipment; and
– if such modifications of interior fittings are carried out using the same technique,
particularly as concerns glued fittings.
All modifications shall be done by or be approved by the manufacturer of the insulated equipment.
Comment to paragraph 6 (c), (i):

Recessed interior and exterior fittings mentioned in a test report count as a reduction in the volume of
insulating material, and the sum of these volumes may be used for any other minor modifications no
matter where they are situated in the unit, as long as the following conditions are met:
• the thickness of the remaining insulation material is not less than that of the tested reference
equipment at the locations of the fittings; and
• the minimum thickness of the remaining insulation material may be locally reduced but shall
be at least 20mm.
In case of modifications, screwed fittings shall be carried out so as to prevent the occurrence of
humidity and icing of the modified components. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/228, para. 68)
4
The present provisions regarding minor and limited modifications apply to equipment manufactured after the date of their entry into force
(30 September 2015).
(ii) If it is refrigerated equipment, in which case the reference equipment shall be refrigerated
equipment,
the conditions set out under (i) above shall be satisfied;
inside circulating fans shall be comparable;
the source of cold shall be identical; and
the reserve of cold per unit of inside surface area shall be greater or equal;
(iii) If it is mechanically refrigerated equipment, in which case the reference equipment shall be
either:
(a) mechanically refrigerated equipment;
– the conditions set out in (i) above shall be satisfied; and
– the effective refrigerating capacity of the mechanical refrigeration appliance per unit
of inside surface area, under the same temperature conditions, shall be greater or
equal; or
(b) insulated equipment which is complete in every detail but minus its mechanical
refrigeration unit which will be fitted at a later date.
The resulting aperture will be filled, during the measurement of the K coefficient, with
close fitting panels of the same overall thickness and type of insulation as is fitted to the
front wall. In which case:
– the conditions set out in (i) above shall be satisfied; and
– the effective refrigerating capacity of the mechanical refrigeration unit fitted

to insulated reference equipment shall be as defined in annex 1, appendix 2,
paragraph 3.2.6.
(iv) If it is heated equipment, in which case the reference equipment may be insulated or heated
equipment,
– the conditions set out under (i) above shall be satisfied;
– the source of heat shall be identical; and
– the capacity of the heating appliance per unit of inside surface area shall be greater or
equal.
(v) If it is mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment, in which case the reference equipment
shall be:
(a) mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment,
– the conditions set out under (i) above shall be satisfied; and
– the effective refrigerating capacity of the mechanical refrigeration or mechanical

refrigeration-heating appliance per unit of inside surface area, under the same
temperature conditions, shall be greater or equal;
– the capacity of the heating appliance per unit of inside surface area shall be greater
or equal;
or
(b) insulated equipment which is complete in every detail but minus its mechanical
refrigeration, heating or mechanical refrigeration-heating appliance, which will be fitted
at a later date.
The resulting aperture will be filled, during the measurement of the K coefficient, with
close fitting panels of the same overall thickness and type of insulation as are fitted to the
front wall, in which case:
– the conditions set out under (i) above shall be satisfied;
and
– the effective refrigerating capacity of the mechanical refrigeration or mechanical

refrigeration-heating unit fitted to insulated reference equipment shall be as defined
in annex 1, appendix 2, paragraph 3.4.7;
– the capacity of the heating appliance per unit of inside surface area shall be greater
or equal.
(d) If, in the course of the six-year period, the production series exceeds 100 units, the
competent authority shall determine the percentage of units to be tested.
Comment to paragraph 6 (d):

When determining the percentage of units (bodies) to be tested, the competent
authority may take into account the manufacturers procedures and quality assurance
systems.
Annex 1, Appendix 2
METHODS AND PROCEDURES FOR MEASURING
AND CHECKING THE INSULATING CAPACITY
AND THE EFFICIENCY OF THE COOLING OR HEATING
Annex l, Appendix 2
APPLIANCES OF SPECIAL
Annex EQUIPMENT
l, Appendix
Annex l, Appendix 2
2 FOR THE
METHODS AND PROCEDURES FOR MEASURING AND CHECKING THE
CARRIAGE
METHODS AND
INSULATING
OFAND
CAPACITY
PERISHABLE
PROCEDURES FOREFFICIENCY
THE
FOODSTUFFS
MEASURINGOF AND CHECKING
THE COOLINGTHE
OR
METHODS AND PROCEDURES FOR MEASURING AND CHECKING THE
INSULATING CAPACITY
HEATING AND THE
APPLIANCES OF EFFICIENCY OF THE COOLING
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT FOR OR
INSULATING CAPACITY AND THE EFFICIENCY OF THE COOLING OR
HEATING APPLIANCES
THE CARRIAGE OF SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
OF PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFSFOR
HEATING APPLIANCES OF SPECIAL EQUIPMENT FOR
THE CARRIAGE OF PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS
1.
1. DEFINITIONS
THE
DEFINITIONS
AND GENERAL
CARRIAGE
AND
PRINCIPLES
OF PERISHABLE
GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOODSTUFFS
1. DEFINITIONS
K coefficient. The AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES
1. 1.11.1
DEFINITIONS
K coefficient. AND
overall heat transfer
GENERAL
The overall
coefficient (K coefficient) of the special equipment is defined by the
PRINCIPLES
heat transfer coefficient (K coefficient) of the special equipment is
following
defined formula:
by the following formula:
1.1 K coefficient. The overall heat transfer coefficient (K coefficient) of the special equipment is
1.1 K coefficient. The overall heat transfer coefficient (K coefficient) of the special equipment is
defined by the following formula: W
defined by the following formula: K =
K =W S .W
∆T
K = S . ∆T
where S. ∆ T
where W
W isis either
eitherthe
the heating
heating power
power or
orthe
the cooling
cooling capacity,asasthe
capacity, thecase
casemay
maybe,be, required
required to to
maintain
maintain
where Waisconstant
either theabsolute
heatingtemperature
power or difference
the cooling∆T betweenasthe
capacity, themean
caseinside
may be,temperature
required T toi
where W is either
a constant the temperature
absolute heating power or the cooling
difference capacity,
∆T between as the inside
the mean case may be, required
temperature T andto the mean
and the mean
maintain outside
a constant temperature
absolute Te, during
temperature continuous
difference ∆T betweenoperation,
the meanwhen the temperature
inside mean i outside Ti
maintain
outsidea temperature
temperatureconstant
Te is absolute temperature
Te, during
constant for body Tofedifference
acontinuous operation, between
∆T when
area S.thethe mean
mean insidetemperature
outside temperatureTT e is
i constant
and the mean outside temperature , mean
duringsurface
continuous operation, when the mean outside
andforthe
a meanofoutside
body mean temperature
surface area S. Te, during continuous operation, when the mean outside
temperature Te is constant for a body of mean surface area S.
1.2 temperature
The meanTsurface
e is constant for a body of mean surface area S.
area S of the body is the geometric mean of the inside surface area Si and the
1.2
1.2 The mean
outside
The mean surface
surface
surfaceareaarea SS of
Se of
area the
the
of body
body isisthe
body:
the thegeometric
geometric mean
mean ofof the
the inside
inside surface
surfacearea
areaSSi and the outside
i and the
1.2 Thesurface
mean area
surface
S area
of the Sbody.
of the body is the geometric mean of the inside surface area Si and the
outside surface e area S of the body:
outside surface area Se ofe the body:
S = Si . Se
S = .
S = Si .SSi e Se
In determining the two surface areas Si and Se, structural peculiarities and surface irregularities of
the body, such the
In determining as chamfers,
two surface wheel-arches
areas Si and and similar features,
Se, structural shalland
peculiarities be taken
surfaceinto account and
irregularities of
In shall
determining
In determining theunder
two two
the surface areasareas
surface Si and Si Sand
e, structural
Setest peculiarities
, structural andifsurface
peculiarities andbody irregularities
surface of of the
irregularities
the body, such as chamfers, wheel-arches and similar features, shall be taken into accountwith
be noted the appropriate heading in reports; however, the is covered and
thecorrugated
body,such
body, suchsheet
as chamfers,
as chamfers, wheel-arches
wheel-arches andshall
and similar
similar features,
features, shall be
shall be takenoccupied,
into
into isaccount and
shall be noted metal
under thethe area considered
appropriate heading be that
in test of the
reports; plane
however, iftaken
surface the body account and
not that
covered ofshall be
with
shall be
noted noted
under under
the the appropriate
appropriate heading in test reports; however, if the body is covered with
the developed
corrugated sheetcorrugated
metal areaheading
thesurface. consideredin testshall reports;
be thathowever,
of the plane if the body occupied,
surface is coverednot with
thatcorrugated
of
corrugated
sheet sheetthe
metal metal
areathe area considered
considered shall be that of the plane surface occupied, not that of
the developed corrugated surface.shall be that of the plane surface occupied, not that of the developed
theFor
developed corrugated
calculating the mean surface.
surface area of the body of a panel van, the test station appointed by the
corrugated surface.
competent authority shall
For calculating the mean surface select from
area one
of theof body
the following
of a panelthree van,methods.
the test station appointed by the
For calculating the mean surface area of the body of a panel van, the test station appointed by the
competent
For calculatingauthority
the meanshall select
surface fromareaone
of ofthe thebody
following three methods.
of a panel van, the test station appointed by the
competent
Method authority shall
A. The select from one of the
manufacturer following three methods.
competent authority shall select from shall
one ofprovide drawings
the following andmethods.
three calculations of the inside and
outside
Methodsurfaces.
A. The manufacturer shall provide drawings and calculations of the inside and
Method A. The manufacturer shall provide drawings and calculations of the inside and
outside
Method surfaces.
A. The manufacturer shall provide drawings and calculations of the inside and outside surfaces.
outside surfaces.
The surface areas Se and Si are determined taking into consideration the projected surface areas
of
Thespecific
surfacedesign
areas
areas Sefeatures
andSiof
Se and thedetermined
Siare
are irregularities
determined of itsinto
taking
taking surface such as curves,
consideration
into consideration thethe corrugations,
projected
projectedsurface wheel
areasareas of
surface
The surface
boxes, etc.areas Se and Si are determined taking into consideration the projected surface areas
of specific design features of the irregularities of its surface such as curves, corrugations, wheel
of specific
specific design
design features
features of ofthe
the irregularities
irregularitiesofofitsitssurface
surfacesuch suchasascurves,
curves, corrugations,
corrugations, wheel
wheelboxes, etc.
boxes, etc.
boxes,
Methodetc.
Method B. The manufacturer
B. The manufacturer shall provide
shall provide drawings drawings
and the and thestation
test test station appointed
appointed bycompetent
by the the
competent
Method
authority authority
B.shall use theshall
The use the calculations
manufacturer
calculations shall provide
according according
to the drawings
schemesto the schemes
5and
and the
formulae andbelow.
formulae
test5 station appointedbelow.
by the
Method B. The manufacturer shall provide drawings and the test station appointed by the
competent authority shall use the calculations according to the schemes 5
and formulae below.
competent authority shallSi use the calculations according
= (((WI × LI) + (HI × LI) + (HI × WI)) × 2)to the schemes 5
and formulae below.
Si = (((WI × LI) + (HI × LI) + (HI × WI)) × 2)
Si
Se == (((WI
(((WE××LI) LE)++ (HI (HE × LI)× LE)+ (HI+ (HE× WI)) × 2) × 2)
× WE))
Se = (((WE × LE) + (HE × LE) + (HE × WE)) × 2)
Where: Se = (((WE × LE) + (HE × LE) + (HE × WE)) × 2)
Where:
Where:
WI is the Y axis of the internal surface area
Where:
WI is the Y axis of the internal surface area
WILIisisthe Y axis
axisofof
ofthetheinternal
internalsurface
surfacearea
WI is the
the XY axis the internal surface area
area
LI is the X axis of the internal surface area
5
5 Therelevant
The relevant figures
figures can be
can be found found
in the in the ATP
ATP Handbook at theHandbook
following link:at the following link:
https://unece.org/atp-handbook
5 https://unece.org/atp-handbook
The relevant figures can be found in the ATP Handbook at the following link:
5
The relevant figures can be found in the ATP Handbook at the following link:
https://unece.org/atp-handbook - 23 -
https://unece.org/atp-handbook
- 23 -
- 23 -
HI is the Z axis of the internal surface area

WE is the Y axis of the external surface area
HIWE
is isis the
the Y axis of the external surfacearea
area
WE theZ Y
axis
axisofofthe
theinternal
externalsurface
surface area
LE is the X axis of the external surface area
WELE isthethe Xaxis
axis ofthe
the externalsurface
surface area
LE is
is the Y X axis of
of the external
external surface area
area
HE is the Z axis of the external surface area
LEHE is the Z axis of the external surface area
HEis is
thethe
XZ axis of of
axis thethe
external surface
external area area
surface
Using the most appropriate formula for the Y axis of the internal surface area
HEUsing
is the the most appropriate formula for the Y axis of the internal surface area
Using theZmost
axisappropriate
of the external surface
formula area
for the Y axis of the internal surface area
Using the most appropriate formula
WI = (WIa xa+ forWIb
the xY(baxis of the
+ c/2) internal
+ WIc surface
x c/2) / (a +area
b + c)
WI = (WIa x a + WIb x (b + c/2) + WIc x c/2) / (a + b + c)
WI==(WIa
WI (WIax ×
a+a/2 + WIb
WIb (a/2
x (b + c/2)++b/2)
WIc+x WIc
c/2) /(b/2))
(a + b/ +
(ac)+ b)
WI = (WIa × a/2 + WIb (a/2 + b/2) + WIc (b/2)) / (a + b)
WI = (WIa × a/2
a ++ WIb
WIb × (a/2 + b/2)++WIc)/2
b + (WIb WIc (b/2))
× c) / (a + bb)+ c)
WI = (WIa × a + WIb × b + (WIb + WIc)/2 × c) / (a + b + c)
Where: WI = (WIa × a + WIb × b + (WIb + WIc)/2 × c) / (a + b + c)
Where:
Where:
WIa is the internal width at the floor or between the wheel arches
Where:
WIaWIaisisthetheinternal
internalwidth
widthatatthe thefloor
floorororbetween
betweenthe wheel
the wheel arches
arches
WIa WIb is the
is the internal
internal width
width at theat floor
the height of thethe
or between vertical edge
wheeledge
archesfrom the floor or above the wheel
WIbWIbisisthetheinternal
internal width
width atat the
the height
height ofthe
of thevertical
vertical edge fromfromthe
thefloor
floor
or or above
above thethe wheel
wheel arches.
arches.
arches.
WIb is the internal width at the height of the vertical edge from the floor or above the wheel
WIc is
WIc is the
the internal
internal width
width along
along the theroof
roof
arches.
WIc is the internal width along the roof
WIc aaisisthe
theheight
height ofofwidth
thevertical
the vertical edge
edge fromthe
from thefloor
floor
a is isthethe internal
height of the alongedge
vertical the roof
from the floor
bbthe
a bis isiseither
either
heightthe
theheight
height between
between thethe
bottom
bottom of of
thethe
vertical edge
vertical andand
edge thethe
roofroof
or between the top
or between the of
top of the
is either theofheight
the vertical
between edge thefrom
bottom the of
floor
the vertical edge and the roof or between the top of
the
wheelwheel arch
arch and and
thethe
toptopof of
the the vertical
vertical edgefrom
edge from thefloor.
the floor.
the wheel arch and the top of the vertical edge from the floor.
b is either the height between the bottom of the vertical edge and the roof or between the top of
the ccwheel
isisthe height
arch between
and the top the roof and point b
c is theheight
the height between
between theof
the the
roof vertical
roof
and and
point edge
b bfrom the floor.
point
Along
c Along
is with
the height
Along the two
between
withthe
thetwo
twoformulae for
the rooffor
formulae and the X and
point
forthe
the b ZZZaxes
axes
axesofof the internal surface:
with formulae XXand
and ofthe
theinternal
internalsurface:
surface:
LI
Along with the twoLI = ((LIa x a)
formulae +X(LIb + LIc) / 2 x b +internal
(LIc x c)) / (a + b + c)
= ((LIa for
x a)the and
+ (LIb + ZLIc)
axes
/ 2ofx the surface:
b + (LIc x c)) / (a + b + c)
Where: LI = ((LIa x a) + (LIb + LIc) / 2 x b + (LIc x c)) / (a + b + c)
Where:
Where:
LIa is the internal length along the floor
Where:
LIaLIaisisthe
theinternal
internallength
lengthalong
alongthethefloor
floor
LIa LIbis is
thethe internal
internal length
length above
along the the wheel arches
floor
LIbLIbisisthe
theinternal
internallength
lengthabove
abovethe thewheel
wheelarches
arches
LIb LIcis is the
the internal
internal length
length alongthe
above thewheel
roof arches
LIc is the internal length along the roof
LIc is the internal length along the roof
LIc a is the height
theheight
internalbetween LIa and
length LIa
along LIb
a is the between andthe
LIb roof
a is the height between LIa and LIb
b is
a bis the height between LIb and LIc
isthe
theheight
heightbetween
betweenLIaLIband
andLIb
LIc
b is the height between LIb and LIc
c is
bcisisthe the height between LIc and the roof
theheight
heightbetween
betweenLIbLIcand
andLIc
the roof
c is the height between LIc and the roof
c is the height between LIc and the WI = (WI back + WI front) / 2
WIroof
= (WI back + WI front) / 2
Where: WI = (WI back + WI front) / 2
Where:
WI back is the width at the bulkhead
Where:
Where:
WI front
WI is the width at the door end
WIback
frontisisthe
thewidth
widthatatthe
thebulkhead
door end
WI front is the width at the door end
WI front is the width at the door end
- 24 -
- 24 -
- 24 -
The external surface area is calculated using the formulae below

WE = WI + declared mean thickness × 2
WE
The external surface area = WI + declared
is calculated using themean thickness
formulae below× 2
LE
WE
LE
= LI
==
LI WI
+ declared
+ declared
+ declared
mean
mean
mean
thickness
thickness
thickness × 2× 2
×2
HE=
LE HI
HE= HI
= LI
++ +declared
declared
declared mean
mean
mean thickness
thickness
thickness ××2 2× 2
Method C.
Method C. IfIfneither
neither of of
HE= thethe
HI +above
above is acceptable
declared thetoexperts,
meantothickness
is acceptable the×experts, the internal
2the internal surface shall
surface shall
be Method
be measured
measured C. Iftoneither
according
according to
thethe of the
andabove
figures
figures and is acceptable
formulae
formulae to
B. the B.
in method
in method experts, the internal surface shall be
Methodmeasured
C. If neithertoof
according thethefigures
aboveand is acceptable
formulae intomethod
the experts,
B. the internal surface shall
Thebe measured
K value
The K value according
shall
shall then to
be
thenthen the
be be figures
calculated
calculated and
based formulae
basedon the in method
internal
on the B.
surface
theinternal
internal area, taking
surface area, the insulation
taking the insulation
thicknessThe
as Knil.
value shallthis
From K calculated
value, the based oninsulation
average surface area,
thickness is taking the from
calculated insulation thickness
thefrom
thickness as
The Kasvalue nil. From
shall then this K value,
be calculated the average insulation thickness is calculated the
assumption nil.
thatFrom
λ forthis
theKinsulation
value, the has a based
average on0.025
the thickness
insulation
value of internal
W/m.°C. surface area,from
is calculated taking
thethe insulation
assumption that λ for
assumption
thickness thatnil.
λ for the insulation has a value of insulation
0.025 W/m.°C.
the as
insulationFromhas this K value,
a value of 0.025the average
W/m.°C. thickness is calculated from the
assumption that λ for the insulation has a value of 0.025
d = Si x ΔT x λ / W W/m.°C.
d = Si x ΔT x λ / W
Once the thickness of the insulation has dbeen = Siestimated,
x ΔT x λ / W
the external surface area is calculated
Once the
and the thickness
mean surface of
areathe insulation has
is determined. The been
final Kestimated, the external
value is derived surface iteration.
from successive area is calculated
andOnce the thickness
the mean surface ofarea
the is
insulation has been
determined. The estimated,
final K the external
value is surface
derived fromarea is calculated
successive iteration.
and theOnce
meanthe thickness
surface area of
is the insulationThe
determined. hasfinal
beenKestimated, the external
value is derived surface areaiteration.
from successive is calculated and
the mean surface area is determined. The final K value is derived from successive iteration.
Figure 1
WI c
c
HE = HI + declared mean thickness x 2
local shapes not

Figures on pages 24, 25 and 26 of the main publication:
considered
Figure 1:
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Figure𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
1:𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ �𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 2� + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ∗ 2
b
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ �𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + � +
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 2
WI b 25 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Declared mean thicknesses (mm) <
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 25
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
HI
HE = HI + declared mean thicknesses*2

a

WI a WE = WI + declared mean thicknesses*2
WE = WI + declared mean thicknesses*2
Figure 2:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
Figure(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
2: 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 �2� + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 �2 + 2� + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �2�)
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
WE = WI + declared mean thickness x 2 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � + � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 2 2 2
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
Figure 3:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Figure𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊3:𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 2
∗ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Key:
Key:
WIa internal width between the wheel arches
WIaarches
WIb internal width above the wheel internal width between the wheel arches
WIc internal width of the roof WIb internal width above the wheel arches
a WIc internal width of the roof

internal height of the wheel arches
- 25 -
b a arches
internal height above the wheel internal height of the wheel arches
- 25 - b arches
internal height above thewidth
wheelends
arches
c internal height above the wheel where the side wall
c internal height above the wheel arches where the side wall widt
Figures at- 25
the-end of the publication:
Figures at the end of the publication:
Figure 1:
Figure 1:
Figure 1:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ �𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ∗
ATP Handbook 2021 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 2 2 23
25
Declared mean thicknesses (mm) < 2
Figure 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
WE = WI WI
+ cdeclared mean thicknesses*2
b
Figure 2:WI b
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � + � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 � �)
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 2 2 2 2
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
a
Figure 3:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
WI a 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + ∗ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
WE 1
Key:

WIb internal width above the wheel arches
WIc internal width of the roof Figure 3
a internal height of the wheel arches
b internal height above the wheel arches
WI c
Figure 1: c internal height above the wheel arches where the side wall width ends
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ �𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ∗
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 2 2
c

WI b
Figures at the25end of the publication:
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
Figure 1:
b
HE = HI + declared mean
Thethicknesses*2
letters "i" and "e" in the numbers of the temperature measuring devices indicate that the devices are
respectively inside or outside the tank.
WE = WI + declared mean thicknesses*2 WI a
a
Figure 2:
Figure 2:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
Note: (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊� 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊WE+
+ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊1 �𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
+ � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 � �) 2
2 2 2 2
(1) Index 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 “I”=in the number 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊of+the
= device for measuring air temperature designates its installation inside
the tank, “e” – outside.
WE = WI + declared mean 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊thickness 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 x+ 2 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
Figure 3: 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
Figure 3: 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊+𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∗ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +
2
∗ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 =
(1) The letters"i" and "e" in 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +the
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +
numbers of𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊the
+temperature
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 measuring devices indicate that the devices
are inside or outside the tank.
(2) "N" is the number of compartments in the tank. "4N" is the minimum number of devices for
Key:
Key: measuring the temperature in all the compartments of the tank.
Wia internal width between the wheel arches
Wibthe wheel
WIb internal width above internal width above the wheel arches
arches
WIc Wicroof internal width of the roof
internal width of the
a internal height of the
a wheelinternal
arches height of the wheel arches
b internal height above
b the wheel arches
internal height above the wheel arches
c internal height above the wheel arches where the side wall width ends
c internal height above the wheel arches where the side wall width ends
Figures at the end of the publication:
Figure 1:
- 26 -
The letters "i" and "e" in the numbers of the temperature measuring devices indicate that the devices are
Figure 4
Figure on page 26 of the main publication:
Figure 4:
(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 )/ 2 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses*2

LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses * 2
Examples on page 27
Figure 5
SIDE OPENING DOOR
ROOF & SIDE PANEL DETAIL WI back
1155 Side Opening Door

WI back
1540 Full Aperture
Figures on page 29 of the main publication:

𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ �𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 2 2
25
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 WI front
HE = HI + declared thicknesses
WI front
WE = WI + declared thicknesses
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 =
2
WE== 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 WI 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
+ mean + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 thickness × 2
declared
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
2 =
WE
WE = mean
= WI
LE = LI + declared WI + thicknesses
mean
+ mean declared
declared thickness
thickness *2 ×2
Wi back
Wi front
Wi = Wi back + Wi front
- 27 -
Examples
Examples
ROOF & SIDE PANEL DETAIL
SIDE OPENING DOOR
1540 Full Aperture
1155 Side Opening Door
- 28 -
METHOD A A
Method
Internal External
Roof 4.125 Roof 4.222
1.29 5.32125 1.5 6.333
Floor 4.125 Floor 4.222
1.57 6.48 1.78 7.52
Sides 4.125 Sides 4.222
1.7 14.025 1.913 16.15337
Bulkhead Bulkhead
1.29 1.5
1.70 1.72 1.91 2.55
1.57 1.78
Door Door
1.29 1.5
1.7 1.72 1.913 2.55
1.57 1.78
Si 29.27 Se 35.11
with wheel arches 0.1922 Si 29.46 Se 35.30

Figure on Figure
pageon page
26 26ofofthe main publication:
Figure 4: the main publication:
(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) Figure
+ (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
4: 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 )/ 2 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =Figure 4: Figure
(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗4: 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 )/ 2 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 +∗𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 +𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
+𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
=
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 )/ 2+∗𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses*2 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =
LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses*2 METHOD B (EXCLUDING WHEEL ARCHES)
LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses*2𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
Examples on page 27
Method B (excluding wheel arches)
LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses*2
Examples on page 27
SIDE OPENING DOOR
SIDE OPENING DOOR
Examples on page 27 ROOF & SIDE PANEL DETAIL
Wia
ROOF & SIDE PANEL DETAIL 1.57
Examples 1155
on pSide
agOpening
e 27 Door 1155
Wib
Side Opening Door
1.57
SIDE OPENING DOOR 1540 Full Aperture
1540 Full Aperture
Wic 1.29
a 0.31
SIDE OPENING
Figures onDOOR
page 29 of the main publication:
Figures on page 29 of the main publication: b 0.315
ROOF & SIDE PANEL DETAIL 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
2 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿c+ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ �𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 1.075
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ �𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 2 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
ROOF & SIDE PANEL DETAIL 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =
2 2
1155 Side Opening Door Declared mean thicknesses (mm) < 25

25
WI 1.481471
Declared
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 mean thicknesses (mm) <
1155 Side Opening Door 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 Declared Thickness 0.22
1540 Full Aperture HE = HI + declared thicknesses WE 1.701471
1540 Full Aperture WE = WI + declared thicknesses
Figures on page 29 of the main publication:

Figures on page 29 of the main
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = publication:
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =
WE = WI + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗LE𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿=+
LI +𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ mean
�𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 thicknesses
+ � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗
declared thicknesses
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =
declared
2 LE = LI + declared2mean thicknesses 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ �𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + � + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗
Wi back
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = Lia 2 24.125
Wi front Wi back
Wi front
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 +Lib 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 4.125
25 Wi = Wi back + Wi front
Lic 4.125
Declared mean thicknesses (mm) < 25
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 a 0.31
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 b 0.315
HE = HI + declared thicknesses c 1.075
LI 4.125
WE = WI + declared thicknesses Declared Thickness 0.203
LE 4.328

𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 )/ 2 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =
LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses
LE = LI + declared mean thicknesses
Wi back Wi back
Wiback 1.57
Wi front Wifront 1.57
Wi front
Wi = Wi back + Wi front Wi = Wi back + Wi front Wi 1.57
Declared Thickness 0.21
Wi back We 1.78
Wi front
- 30 -
METHOD C (EXCLUDING WHEEL ARCHES)

Method C (excluding wheel arches)
Wia 1.57 Lia 4.125 Wib 1.57

Wib 1.57 Lib 4.125 Wif 1.57
Wic 1.29 Lic 4.125
a 0.31 a 0.31 Method C (excluding wheel arches)
b 0.315 b 0.315
Method
Method CWib
(excluding
C wheel arches)
c Wia 1.075 1.57 c Lia 1.075 4.125
Method C (excluding
(excluding
1.57 wheel
wheel arches)
arches)
Wib 1.57 Lib 4.125 Wif Si1.57 Se S W Delta T k Lambda d
WI Wic 1.481471
Wia Wia 1.29
1.57 1.57 LILia Lic 4.125
4.125 4.125 Wi
Wib 1.57
1.57 29.37 300 25 0.409 0.025 0.0612
Wia 1.57 Lia
Lia 4.125
4.125 Wib
Wib 1.6924 1.57 1.5729.37
WE a
Wib Wib 1.6039 0.31
1.57 1.57 LE
Lib a 4.2474
4.125 0.31 We
Wif 1.57 33.43 31.34 300 25 0.383 0.025 0.0653
Wib 1.57 Lib
Lib 4.125
4.125 Wif 1.57
WE b
Wic Wic 1.6120
1.29 0.315 LE
Lic b 4.2556 0.315
4.125 4.125 We Wif 1.7006 1.5729.37 33.68 31.45 300 25 0.382 0.025 0.0655
Wic 1.29
1.29 Lic
Lic 4.125
WE
a c 1.6125
0.31 1.075 LE
a c 4.2560
0.31 1.075 We 1.7010 29.37 33.69 31.46 300 25 0.381 0.025 0.0655
aa 0.31
0.31 aa 0.31
0.31
b 0.315 0.315 b 0.315 0.315 Si Se S W Delta T k Lambda d
bbWI 0.315 bbLI 0.315
c 1.481471
1.075 c 1.075 4.125 Wi 1.57 29.37 300 25 0.409 0.025 0.0612
cc 1.075
1.075 cc Results from 1.075
1.075 all three methods (excluding wheel arches)
WE 1.6039 LE 4.2474 We 1.6924
Si 29.37
Se Se 33.43S 31.34 300 T k 25 0.383 0.025 0.0653
Si
Si Se SS W W W
Delta Delta
Delta TT kk
Lambda d
Lambda
Lambda dd
WI WI WE 1.4814711.6120 LI LE 4.1254.2556 Wi WiWe 1.571.7006 29.37
29.37 29.37 33.68 31.45 300 300 25 250.409 0.3820.025 0.025 0.0655
0.06120.0612
RESULTS FROM ALL THREE METHODS
WI 1.481471
1.481471 LI
LI 4.125
4.125 Wi 1.57
1.57 29.37 300
300 25 0.409 0.025
WE WE WE 1.6125
1.60391.6039 LE LE Si 4.24744.2560 Se We WeWeS 1.69241.7010 W 29.3733.43Delta
29.37 29.37 T
33.6931.34 k
31.46 300 25 25
300 300 250.383 0.409
0.3810.025 0.025
0.025 0.0612
0.0655
0.06530.0653
WE 1.6039 LE
LE 4.2474
4.2474 We 1.6924
1.6924 29.37 33.43
33.43 31.34
31.34 300 25
25 0.383
0.383 0.025
0.025 0.0653
WE WE 1.61201.6120 LE 4.2556 We 1.7006 29.37 33.68 31.45 300 25 0.382 0.025 0.0655
WE WE
WE Method
1.6120
1.61251.6125 LEA
LE
LE 29.27
4.2560
4.2556
4.2556 35.11
(EXCLUDING WHEEL ARCHES)
We
We
We 32.05
1.7010
1.7006
1.7006 300
29.37
29.37
29.37 29.37
33.6825.00
33.68
33.69 33.6931.46
31.45
31.45
3000.374
300
300 25
25 0.382
0.382 0.025
0.025
25 250.381 0.3810.025 0.025
0.0655
0.0655
0.06550.0655
WE 1.6125
Method B
LE
LE Results
4.2560from allWe
4.2560 three methods
We 1.7010
1.7010
29.37 (excluding
29.37 33.69wheel
35.79 arches)
31.46
31.46 300
300 25
32.420.381 0.025 0.0655
300 25.00 0.370
Method C Results 29.37
Results from from all 33.69
three methods 31.46 (excluding 300 wheel 25.00
arches) 0.381
Results
Si fromSeall all threethree Smethods methods (excluding (excluding
W wheel
Delta Tarches)
wheel arches) k
Method A 29.27 35.11 32.05 300 25.00 0.374
Si Si shall Se also apply S W Delta T surfaceTTk kk area
The
Method above B methods Si 29.37 Se Se 35.79 SSfor calculating 32.42 W W the 300 mean Delta
Delta 25.00 of the body of
0.370
railway Method Methodwagons A Aother29.27 than 29.27 tank 35.11
wagons, 35.11 32.05
including 32.05 those 300with 300 a 25.00
rounded 25.00 0.374
roof. In this case the
0.374
Method A C 29.27
29.37 35.11
33.69 32.05
31.46 300 25.00 0.374
0.381
calculationsMethod Method Baccording B to 29.37
29.37 the schemes 35.79 35.79and formulae 32.42 32.42 given 300 below 300 shall
25.00 be used:
25.00 0.370 0.370
Method B 29.37 35.79 32.42 300 25.00 0.370
Method Method C C 29.37 29.37 33.69 33.69 31.46 31.46 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 300𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 300 25.00 25.00 0.381 0.381
Method𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 The = 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊above C ∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 29.37
2 ∙ (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 33.69
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)also ∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊apply + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊for 31.46
∙ calculating + 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 ∙ 300 ∙ the(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊mean 25.00
− 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) 0.381
methods shall surface area of the body of
2 2
railway
The above wagons methods othershall than also tank apply wagons, forincluding 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 those
calculating thewith
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 mean a rounded
surface roof. area Inofthis
thecase
bodytheof
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 The
calculations = above
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
The ∙ above methods
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
according+ 2 ∙
methods shall
(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
to + also
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
shall
the schemes apply
also∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊apply for𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
+
and calculating
for ∙
formulae +
calculating 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
given ∙ the mean the
below ∙ mean surface
(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 −
shall 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
surface
be areaused: of the
area of body
the of of
body
railway 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 The wagons above methods
other than shall
tank alsowagons, apply for
including calculating
2thosethose 2 awiththe mean surface
a rounded area
roof. of the
Incase body
this case of
the
railway railway wagons wagons other otherthan tank
than wagons,
tank wagons, including including those with with rounded
a rounded roof. In
roof. this
In this the
case the
railway
calculations wagons according other than tank
to the schemes wagons, and formulae including those1
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥given with
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
below a rounded
shall roof.
be used: In this case the
calculations calculations 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆according to + the to2schemes 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 and𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 formulae
+ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 given +below shall be −used:
calculations 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =according𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
according 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 =to4the
the
∙ (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊schemes
∙ ��
+ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
schemes � +and
and
∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 formulae
(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊formulae ∙ given
− 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 �given below
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 ∙ below shall
∙ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
shall be used:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
be used:
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 2
2 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆=𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∙∙ + 2 ∙ 2(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∙∙ + 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿)
∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊+∙ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 ∙ + ∙𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 −∙ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 == 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊++
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 +2 2∙ (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊++ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) ∙∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
+ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
2 ∙∙ ∙ 22+ +𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥1𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋∙∙ ∙2 2∙∙ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 − − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
− 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 2 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 2
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 4+
2 ∙ (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∙ ��𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) ∙�𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ++ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − ∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) +𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋�∙ 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 1 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
∙ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 == 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + +2 2 ∙∙ (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
(𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 + +2𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊∙∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿) 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 ∙∙ 2 + +𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋2 ∙∙ ∙∙ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 4 ∙ �� 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓�2 + (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊2− 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) 2 1 �1 2 2
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 1
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
∙ �� ∙ ��𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 =𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊4 = 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙+𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓��2(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
� 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 �𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥1
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 4 4 ∙ 2��𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 +
+ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 −
− 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) �
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 4 ∙ �� 2 2 � + (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) 1 �1
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
Where: 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥2 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 1
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 4 ∙ �� 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿+ (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
� 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 2 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
� 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 is the weighted mean inner 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 =
=4
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 height 4 ∙∙ 2 ��
��of the 2 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 ��= body + (𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
+
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋on a −
(𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 −central𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) axis 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 �� X, in m;
2
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 2𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
is the length of the inner arc of the rounded 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 =𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 =𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙roof, 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 22 in m;
2
Where: 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓= 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
2 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 2
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 is the mean outer height of the body on a central 2 axis, in m;
Where: 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 is the weighted mean inner height of the body on a central axis X, in m;
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 Where:Where:
isWhere:
the length of the outer arc of the rounded roof, in m;
2 is𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃the
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 isisthe weighted length mean
of theinner innerheight arc of of thethe rounded bodybody onroof, a central in m; axisaxis X, inX,m;in m;
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
HI2 is
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 isthe the
the weighted weighted
weighted mean meaninner
mean innerheight
inner heightof
height ofofthe the thebody bodyon ononaa acentral central
centralaxis axisX,X,ininm; m;
3.14159, is the number Pi.
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃≈ 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
is𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
the
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 is length
is thelength of the
mean innerinner
outer arc of
height ofthe therounded
body onroof, a central in m;inaxis, in m;
The2
maximum
2 isisthe
the the lengthlengthrelative
of
ofofthe thetheinner
error inner arc
arc arcof
in determining ofofthe
the theroundedrounded PI androof,
rounded roof,
PE roof, ininin
m;
m;m;way shall not exceed
this
2
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 HE
0.3619% is the is (the
themean length
error outer of height
theheight outer of the
arc body
of the onrounded aon central roof,axis,in inm;m;in
2 isis
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 isthe the
themean meanis
mean outer always
outer
outer height
height positive).
of
of the the body
the body
body onon aaacentral
central
central axis,
axis,
axis, in m;
in m;
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
is𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋the ≈
is length
3.14159, of is
the outer
the arc of
number the
Pi. rounded roof,roof,
in m;ininm;m;
2 2 isisthe
thelength
the length
length of
ofofthe
the
the outer
outer
outer arc
arc
arc of
ofofthe
therounded
the rounded
rounded roof,
roof, in m;
2
The
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 ≈ maximum
3.14159, is therelative
number error in determining PI and PE in this way shall not exceed
Pi. Pi.
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 ≈ 3.14159,
≈ 3.14159,
3.14159,
0.3619%
isthe
(theisis
the number
the number
error is alwaysPi.
number Pi.positive).
The Themaximum
maximum relative errorerror
in determining PI and and
PE in this waywayshallshall
not exceed
maximum relative
The maximum relative
relative error
error in
in determining
in determiningPI
determining PI and PE
PI and PE in this
in this
PE in this way
way shall not
shall not exceed
not exceed
exceed 0.3619% (the
0.3619%
0.3619% (the error
(the is
error always
is positive).
always positive).
0.3619% (the error
error is always positive). is always positive).
- 31 -
- 31 -
- 31 -- 31 -
- 31 -
Figure 6: Estimated values

Figurevalues for a body
6: Estimated with a arounded
values roof
Figure 6: Estimated for a body withfor body with
a rounded roof a rounded roof
Temperature measuring points

Temperature measuring points
1.3 Temperature measuring
In the case points
of parallelepipedic bodies, the mean inside temperature of the body (T ) is the
1.3 In the case of parallelepipedic bodies, the mean inside temperature of the body (Ti)i is the
arithmetic mean of the temperatures measured 10 cm from the walls at the following 12 points:
arithmetic
1.3 mean
In the case of the temperatures
of parallelepipedic measured
bodies, the mean10 cm from
inside the walls
temperature at the
of the following
body 12arithmetic
(Ti) is the points:
(a)meanThe
of the temperatures measured 10 cm from the walls at the following 12 points:
eight inside corners of the body; and
(a) The eight inside corners of the body; and
(a) The eight inside corners of the body; and
(b) The centres of the four inside faces having the largest area.
If the body is not parallelepipedic, the 12 points of measurements shall be distributed as
If Ifthe
thebody
body isisasnotparallelepipedic,
not parallelepipedic,
the 12the 12 points
points of measurements shall beas distributed as
satisfactorily possible having regard to the of measurements
shape shall be distributed
of the body. satisfactorily as
satisfactorily as possible
possible having regard tohaving regard
the shape tobody.
of the the shape of the body.
1.4 In the case of parallelepipedic bodies, the mean outside temperature of the body (Te) is the
1.4 1.4
In In
thethecase
caseof
of parallelepipedic bodies,
parallelepipedic bodies, thethe mean
mean outside
outside temperature
temperature of the(Te)body
of the body is the(T ) is the
arithmetic
arithmetic mean of the temperatures measured 10 cm from the walls at the following 12e points:
arithmetic
mean of mean of the temperatures
the temperatures measured
measured 10 cm from 10
thecm from
walls thefollowing
at the walls at12the following 12 points:
points:
(a) The eight outsidecorners
corners of the body; and
(a) (a) The
Theeight
eightoutside
outside cornersofofthe
thebody;
body;and
and
(b) TheThe centres of thefour
four outside faces having the largest
area. area.
(b)(b) The centres of
centres of the
the fouroutside
outsidefaces having
faces the largest
having the largest area.
If Ifthe bodyisisnotnot
the body parallelepipedic,
parallelepipedic, the 12 the 12ofpoints
points of measurement
measurement shall be
shall be distributed distributed asas
as satisfactorily
If possible
the body is not parallelepipedic, the 12 points of measurement shall be distributed as
satisfactorily as possible
having regard to having regard
the shape of thetobody.
the shape of the body.
satisfactorily as possible having regard to the shape of the body.
1.5 1.5 The
Themean
mean temperature
temperatureofofthethe
walls of theofbody
walls the isbody
the arithmetic mean of the
is the arithmetic meanofoutside
mean temperature
the mean outside
1.5 Theof mean
the temperature
body and the of inside
mean the walls of the of
temperature bodythe is the arithmetic mean of the mean outside
body:
temperature of the body and the mean inside temperature of the body:
temperature of the body and the mean inside temperature of the body:
T +T
T e e+ T i i
2
2
1.6 Temperature
Temperaturemeasuring instrumentsprotected
protectedagainst
against radiation shall be placed inside and outside
1.6 1.6
Temperature measuring instruments
measuring instruments protected againstradiation
radiationshall be placed
shall inside
be placed and outside
inside the
and outside
thebody
bodyat at
thethe points
points specified
specified in paragraphs
in paragraphs 1.3 and1.3
1.4and 1.4appendix.
of this of this appendix.
the body at the points specified in paragraphs 1.3 and 1.4 of this appendix.
Steady state period and duration of test
1.7 The mean outside temperatures and the mean inside temperatures of the body, taken over a steady
period of not less than 12 hours, shall not vary by more than ± 0.3 °C, and these temperatures shall not
vary by more than ± 1.0 °C during the preceding 6 hours.
- 32 -
- 32 -
The difference between the heating power or cooling capacity measured over two periods of not less
than 3 hours at the start and at the end of the steady state period, and separated by at least 6 hours, shall
be less than 3%.
The mean values of the temperatures and heating or cooling capacity over at least the last 6 hours of the
steady state period will be used in K coefficient calculation.
The mean inside and outside temperatures at the beginning and the end of the calculation period of at
least 6 hours shall not differ by more than 0.2 °C.
2. INSULATING CAPACITY OF EQUIPMENT

Procedures for measuring the K coefficient
2.1 Equipment other than liquidfoodstuffs tanks

2.1.1 The K coefficient shall be measured in continuous operation either by the internal cooling method or by
the internal heating method. In either case, the empty body shall be placed in an insulated chamber.
Test method
2.1.2 Where the internal cooling method is used, one or more heat exchangers shall be placed inside the body.
The surface area of these exchangers shall be such that, if a fluid at a temperature not lower than 0 °C 6
passes through them, the mean inside temperature of the body remains below + 10 °C when continuous
operation has been established. Where the internal heating method is used, electrical heating appliances
(resistors, etc.) shall be used. The heat exchangers or electrical heating appliances shall be fitted with fans
having a delivery rate sufficient to obtain 40 to 70 air charges per hour related to the empty volume of
the tested body, and the air distribution around all inside surfaces of the tested body shall be sufficient
to ensure that the maximum difference between the temperatures of any 2 of the 12 points specified in
paragraph 1.3 of this appendix does not exceed 2 °C when continuous operation has been established.
2.1.3 Heat quantity: The heat dissipated by the electrical resistance fan heaters shall not exceed a flow of
1W/cm2 and the heater units shall be protected by a casing of low emissivity.
The electrical energy consumption shall be determined with an accuracy of ±0.5%.
Test procedure
2.1.4 Whatever the method employed, the mean temperature of the insulated chamber shall throughout the
test be kept uniform, and constant in compliance with paragraph 1.7 of this appendix, at a level such that
the temperature difference between the inside of the body and the insulated chamber is 25 °C ± 2 °C, the
average temperature of the walls of the body being maintained at + 20 °C ± 0.5 °C.
2.1.5 During the test, whether by the internal cooling method or by the internal heating method, the mass
of air in the chamber shall be made to circulate continuously so that the speed of movement of the air
10 cm from the walls is maintained at between l and 2 metres/second.
2.1.6 The appliances for generating and distributing cold or heat and for measuring the quantity of cold or
heat exchanged and the heat equivalent of the air-circulating fans shall be started up. Electrical cable
losses between the heat input measuring instrument and the tested body shall be established by a
measurement or calculation and subtracted from the total heat input measured.
2.1.7 When continuous operation has been established, the maximum difference between the temperatures
at the warmest and at the coldest points on the outside of the body shall not exceed 2 °C.
2.1.8 The mean outside temperature and the mean inside temperature of the body shall each be read at least
every 5 minutes.
6
To prevent frosting.
2.2 Liquid-foodstuffs tanks

2.2.1 The method described below applies only to single-compartment or multiple-compartment tank
equipment intended solely for the carriage of liquid foodstuffs such as milk. Each compartment of such
tanks shall have at least one manhole and one discharge-pipe connecting socket; where there are several
compartments they shall be separated from one another by non-insulated vertical partitions.
2.2.2 K coefficients shall be measured in continuous operation by internal heating of the empty tank in an
insulated chamber.
Test method
2.2.3 An electrical heating appliance (resistors, etc.) shall be placed inside the tank. If the tank has several
compartments, an electrical heating appliance shall be placed in each compartment. The electrical
heating appliances shall be fitted with fans with a delivery rate sufficient to ensure that the difference
between the maximum temperature and the minimum temperature inside each compartment does
not exceed 3 °C when continuous operation has been established. If the tank comprises several
compartments, the difference between the mean temperature in the coldest compartment and the
mean temperature in the warmest compartment shall not exceed 2 °C, the temperatures being measured
as specified in paragraph 2.2.4 of this appendix.
2.2.4 Temperature measuring instruments protected against radiation shall be placed inside and outside the
tank 10 cm from the walls, as follows:
(a) If the tank has only one compartment, measurements shall be made at a minimum of 12 points
positioned as follows:
The four extremities of two diameters at right angles to one another, one horizontal and the
other vertical, near each of the two ends of the tank;
The four extremities of two diameters at right angles to one another, inclined at an angle of 45°
to the horizontal, in the axial plane of the tank;
Comment to paragraph 2.2.4 (a):

The layout of the placement of air temperature measuring devices inside and outside tanks with
one compartment is shown in figure 1 in the section on ATP Examples of Good Practice at the
end of this publication. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/220, para. 40)
(b) If the tank has two compartments, the measurements shall be made at least at the following points:
Near the end of the first compartment and near the partition with the second compartment,
at the extremities of three radiuses forming 120° angles, one of the radiuses being directed
vertically upwards.
Near the end of the second compartment and near the partition with the first compartment,
at the extremities of three radiuses forming 120° angles, one of the radiuses being directed
vertically downwards.
Comment to paragraph 2.2.4 (b):

The layout of the placement of air temperature measurement devices inside and outside tanks
with two compartments is shown in figure 2. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/222, para. 35)
(c) If the tank has several compartments, the points of measurement shall be as follows:
for each of the two end compartments, at least the following:
The extremities of a horizontal diameter near the end and the extremities of a vertical diameter
near the partition;
and for each of the other compartments, at least the following:
The extremities of a diameter inclined at an angle of 45° to the horizontal near one of the
partitions and the extremities of a diameter perpendicular to the first and near the other
partition.
Comment to paragraph 2.2.4 (c):

The layout of the placement of air temperature measuring devices inside and outside tanks
with three or more compartments is shown in figure 3 in the section on ATP Examples of Good
Practice at the end of this publication. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/220, para. 40)
(d) The mean inside temperature and the mean outside temperature of the tank shall respectively be
the arithmetic mean of all the measurements taken inside and all the measurements taken outside
the tank. In the case of tanks having at least two compartments, the mean inside temperature of
each compartment shall be the arithmetic mean of the measurements made in the compartment,
and the number of those measurements in each compartment shall be no less than four and the
total number of measurements in all compartments of the tank shall be no less than twelve.
Test procedure
2.2.5 Throughout the test, the mean temperature of the insulated chamber shall be kept uniform, and constant
in compliance with paragraph 1.7 of this appendix, at a level such that the difference in temperature
between the inside of the tank and that of the insulated chamber is not less than 25 °C ± 2 °C, with the
average temperature of the tank walls being maintained at + 20 °C ± 0.5 °C.
2.2.6 The mass of air in the chamber shall be made to circulate continuously so that the speed of movement
of the air 10 cm from the walls is maintained at between l and 2 metres/second.
2.2.7 The appliances for heating and circulating the air and for measuring the quantity of heat exchanged and
the heat equivalent of the air-circulating fans shall be started up.
2.2.8 When continuous operation has been established, the maximum difference between the temperatures
at the warmest and at the coldest points on the outside of the tank shall not exceed 2 °C.
every 5 minutes.
2.3 Provisions common to all types of insulated equipment
2.3.1 Verification of the K coefficient
Where the purpose of the tests is not to determine the K coefficient but simply to verify that it is below
a certain limit, the tests carried out as described in paragraphs 2.1.1 to 2.2.9 of this appendix may be
stopped as soon as the measurements made show that the K coefficient meets the requirements.
2.3.2 Accuracy of measurements of the K coefficient
Testing stations shall be provided with the equipment and instruments necessary to ensure that the K
coefficient is determined with an expanded uncertainty of ± 10% when using the method of internal
cooling and ± 5% when using the method of internal heating. In calculating the expanded uncertainty
of measurement of the K coefficient, the confidence level should be at least 95%.
Testing stations
Testing shall shall
stations be provided with with
be provided the equipment and instruments
the equipment necessary
and instruments to ensure
necessary that that
to ensure
the Kthe
coefficient is determined with an expanded uncertainty of ± 10% when using the method
K coefficient is determined with an expanded uncertainty of ± 10% when using the method
of internal cooling
of internal and ±and
cooling 5%±when usingusing
5% when the method of internal
the method heating.
of internal In calculating
heating. the the
In calculating
expanded uncertainty of measurement of the K coefficient, the confidence level
expanded uncertainty of measurement of the K coefficient, the confidence level33should
ATP Handbook 2021 should be be
at least 95%.95%.
at least
Comments to paragraph
Comments 2.3.2:2.3.2:
to paragraph
Comments to paragraph 2.3.2:
1. Examples
1. for the
1. Examples
Examples for
for uncertainty
the
the uncertaintywhich
uncertainty are
which
which normally taken
are normally
are normally taken into
taken
into account
into by
account bytest
account
the thebytest
thestations
test
stations are are
arestations
temperature, heat output (or cold production) and the surface area of the
temperature, heat output (or cold production) and the surface area of the body.
temperature, heat output (or cold production) and the surface area of the body. body.
The expanded
The expanded uncertainty
uncertainty of of
thethe measurementof of the
the KKcoefficient, U(K), can be obtained using using
The expanded uncertainty ofmeasurement
the measurement of the coefficient, U(K),
K coefficient, can
U(K), be obtained
can be obtained using
the recommendations
the recommendations in paragraph
in paragraph 6.3.3 of
6.3.3 6.3.3 ISO/IEC
of ISO/IEC Guide GuideGuide98-3:2008. In
98-3:2008. this case:
In thisIncase:
the recommendations in paragraph of ISO/IEC 98-3:2008. this case:
𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)
= 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ∙=𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)
∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)
where: where:
where:
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 is the K𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 isiscoverage
thecoverage
the factor
coverage forforthe
factor
factor forselected
the confidence
the selected
selected level(for
confidence
confidence level (for
level a(for
confidence
levellevel
a confidence
a confidence of 95%ofthis
95%
level of
maythis
95%may
this may
be taken be taken
be as 2;asas
taken for
2;2;99%,
forfor asas3);
99%,
99%, 3);as 3);
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐is(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)
theisis
combined standard
the combined
combined uncertainty
standard
standard of of
uncertainty
uncertainty the ofmeasurement
the the measurement
measurement of
of the
theofKKcoefficient.
coefficient.
the K coefficient.
The combined
Thecombined
The combined standard standard
standard uncertainty
uncertainty uncertainty ofofthe measurement
theofmeasurement the measurement ofofthe the Kof Kthe coefficient
coefficient is an is
K coefficient an is approximation
approximation an approximation
of theof standard
of the thestandard deviation
standarddeviation deviation of the
of the K
of Kthe coefficient
coefficient K coefficient and characterizes
and characterizesand characterizes the
the rangethe range of values
rangewhich
of values which
of values
may which may may
reasonably
reasonablybebeassigned
reasonably be assigned assigned to the
to the K
to the coefficient.
K coefficient. K coefficient.
SinceSince the the
Since Kthe Kcoefficient
K coefficient
coefficient isisdetermined
determined is determined by a by a by
functional functional adependence
functional dependence that dependence
includes thatsuch includes
that includes
physical such such
values physical
as physical
values values
heat as heat
output as heat output
(or cold (or
outputproduction) cold
(or cold production)
of heat production) of
exchangers, heat exchangers,
of heat
external exchangers, external
and internalexternal and
temperaturesinternal
and internal temperatures
of the body temperatures
of theand
ofbody the thebody and mean theand mean
surface the area mean surface thearea
of surface body,of area
whichtheofbody, are theinbody, which
turn measured which are inare turn
with measured
insome
turnstandard
measured with some
with some
uncertainty, standardstandard
uncertainty,
uncertainty, the combined
the combined uncertainty uncertainty
the combined uncertainty of the measurement of the K coefficient can be calculated on the basis of of the of measurement
the measurement of the of K thecoefficient
K coefficientcan becan calculated
be calculated
on thethe
onbasis the of
law ofthe
basis thepropagation
oflaw theoflaw theofof propagation
the
uncertainty propagation of uncertainty
described of uncertainty
in section described 5 ofdescribed
ISO/IEC in section 5 of ISO/IEC
in section
Guide 98-3:2008, 5 of GuideGuide
ISO/IEC
taking
98-3:2008,
98-3:2008,
into consideration
taking into
taking consideration
into consideration
the correlation (over time) of
the correlation
the thecorrelation
internal and external
(over time)
(over time) of the internal
of the of
temperatures
and
internal
the body,
external
and external
temperatures
temperatures
the heat output (or
of theofbody, the body,
cold
the heat
production) the output heat
and the
(or
output
inside(or
cold production)
cold production)
temperature
and the
of the body: andinside temperature
the inside temperature of theof the
body:body:
��
⃓ 2 2
⃓
⃓ �
(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
- 36 - - �36 +
2
� 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 �� ∙∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆)
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) 2
� +⋯
⃓ � 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆̅ ̅ ∙ (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 )� + - � ̅2 � �𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 )� + ⋯
⃓ � � 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆̅ 2 ∙ (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 � − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
�
⃓ 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ∙ (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 ) 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ∙ (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 ) 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
⃓
⃓ � 22 ∙ �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 )22 + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 )22 + 2 ∙ 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 , 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ) ∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ) ∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 )�
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾) = ⃓ �
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ∙ �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ) + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ) + 2 ∙ 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 , 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ) ∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ) ∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 )� + ⋯
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾) = ⃓
⃓ ̅ 2 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇� − � � )4 +⋯
⃓
⃓ 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆̅ 2 ∙∙ (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤)4
⃓⃓ 22 ∙∙ 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 �� ∙∙ 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊,
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖)) ∙∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) ∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 )
∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖)
⃓ ̅ (|𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇� − �
2 � |) 3
⎷⎷ 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆̅ 2 ∙∙ (|𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤|)3
where:
where:
where:
�� ,, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 ��𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒,, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 � �𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 , 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆̅ ̅ are sample mean values respectively for the heat output (or cold production), in W;
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 , 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 are samplemean
are sample meanvalues values respectively
respectively for the forheat the heat output output(or cold (orproduction),
cold production), in in W;
the
the external
external and internal temperatures of the body, in °C; and the area of the average surface of
W; the externaland 2 internal
and internal temperatures temperaturesofof thethe body, body, in °C; inand °C;the and area theofarea of the average
the average surface surface of
the body,
the body, in in m2 ;
of the body, inmm22;;
(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊), (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ), (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ), (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) are the combined standard uncertainties of measurement,
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢

𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) are are thethe combined combined standard standard uncertainties uncertainties
of measurement, of measurement,
respectively
respectively of the heat output (or cold cold production), production), in in W; W; the the external
external and and internal
internal temperatures
temperatures
respectively ofof thethe heat heat output output (or cold (or production), in W; the external and internal 2temperatures
of the
of the body, body, in °C; °C; and the the area of of the the average average surface surface of of thethe body,body, in m22 ;
of the body, inin °C; andand the areaarea of the average surface of the body, in m2; in m ;
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒,, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖), ), .𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖)) are the correlation coefficients, respectively, of the value vectors of the
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 .𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 are arethe thecorrelation correlation coefficients, coefficients, respectively, respectively, of the value of the value
vectors vectors of the
of the
external
external and internal
and internal temperatures temperatures of of the the body, body, and and of of the the heat heat output output (or (or cold
cold production)
production) and and
external and internal temperatures of the body, and of the heat output (or cold production) and
the internal
the internal temperature temperature of of the the body. body.
the internal temperature of the body.
The correlation
The correlation coefficient coefficient may be be calculated
calculated as as a linear linear correlation correlation coefficientcoefficient (Pearson
The correlation coefficient maymay be calculated as a lineara correlation coefficient (Pearson (Pearson
correlation
correlation coefficient).
coefficient). However,
However, it should
it should be
be in borne
borne in
in mind
mind that
that in changes
changes in the
in the values
values of of the
the
correlation
vectors for for heat coefficient).
heat output output (or However, (or cold it
cold production), should
production), and be borne and particularly mind
particularly for that changesfor the the
the external values of
external temperature the
temperature of of the
the
vectors
vectors for heat output (or cold production), andvector particularly for the external temperature
body,
body, produce
produce corresponding
corresponding changes
changes in
in the the vector of
ofofthe the internal temperature of the body, with
of
some the body, shift (or produce
(or lag) over corresponding
over time. time. This Thischanges time lag lag in theis due duevector to heat heat theinternal
internaltemperature
exchange temperature
processes in
of the
of
in
the body, with
the “air
“air inside
inside
some
body, shift
with some lag)
shift (or lag) over time. This time lagsystem. time is to
is due toIfheat exchange processes
exchange processes the
inthe external
the
the special
special equipment-insulation-environment” there is a change in
the
temperature “air insideequipment-insulation-environment”
thethe
of specialbody, equipment-insulation-environment”
this may take several hours.
system. system.
The
If thereIf there
actual time
is a ischange
lag cana change
be
in inthe external
established either
temperature
the external of the body,ofthis
temperature themay body, takethis several
may take hours.
several The hours. actual The time
actual lagtime
canlag be can
established
be either
visually
visually (by
(by looking looking at
at (by graphs
graphs of at of the
the changing changing values)
values) or
orvalues)by selecting
by selecting the maximum
the maximum linear
linear
established
correlationeither coefficient,visually withlooking consistentgraphs selection of the of the changing
the shift shift variantsvariantsorfor forbythe
selecting
internal thetemperature
correlation
maximum
coefficient, with consistent selection of the internal temperature
vector. linear correlation coefficient, with consistent selection of the shift variants for the
vector.
internal temperature vector.
The combined
The combined standard standard uncertainty uncertainty of of measurement
measurement of of the the heat heat output output (or (or cold
cold production),
production), and and
that of
that of the the external external and and internal internal temperatures temperatures of of the the body, body, can can be be determined
determined using using thethe
recommendations in sections
recommendations in sections 4 and 5 of ISO/IEC Guide 98-3:2008, according to the following 4 and 5 of ISO/IEC Guide 98-3:2008, according to the following
formulae:
formulae:
some shift (or lag) over time. This time lag is due to heat exchange processes in the “air inside
the special equipment-insulation-environment” system. If there is a change in the external
temperature of the body, this may take several hours. The actual time lag can be established either
34 visually (by looking at graphs of the changing values) or by selecting the maximum
ATP Handbook 2021 linear
correlation coefficient, with consistent selection of the shift variants for the internal temperature
vector.
TheThe
combined
combinedstandard
standarduncertainty of measurement
uncertainty of measurementofofthe theheat
heatoutput
output(or(or cold
cold production), and
production),
thatandofthat
theofexternal
the external and internal temperatures of the body, can be determined using theusing the
and internal temperatures of the body, can be determined
recommendations
recommendationsininsections
sections 44 and
and 55ofofISO/IEC
ISO/IEC Guide
Guide 98-3:2008,
98-3:2008, according
according to the following
to the following
formulae:
formulae:
∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � )2

� )2 + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)2 = � 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊) = �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊)2
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∙ (𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 − 1)
�
⃓ 2
⃓ ∑𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=1 �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ��
⃓
⃓
𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
⃓ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � �+⋯
⃓1≤𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘≤𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 ∙ (𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 − 1)
2 ⃓
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ) = �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 �𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 � + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 )2 = ⃓
�𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 )2 + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ⃓
⃓
⃓ ∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1�𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�� 2
𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 �
⃓
⃓ +⋯
⃓ 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∙ (𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 − 1)
⎷ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 )2
�
⃓ 2
⃓ ∑𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 − ��
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 �
⃓
⃓
𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗=1 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
⃓ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � �+⋯
⃓1≤𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘≤𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ∙ (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 1)
2 ⃓
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ) = �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 )2 + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 � + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 )2 = ⃓
⃓
⃓
⃓ ∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1�𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ��
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 �
� 2
⃓
⃓ +⋯
⃓ 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∙ (𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 − 1)
⎷ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 )2
2
2 2
2
�𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 )�22 + �𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 )�22
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) = ��𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
�𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ∙∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒)�
)� + + �𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 �𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ∙∙ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖)�
)�
=�
(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) =
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) � 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 - 37 - 4 ∙ 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ∙ 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
44 ∙∙ 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ∙∙ 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
where:
where:
where:
where:
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 � ), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 ), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ��𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 � ��𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 � are the standard uncertainties of measurement of the
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 �, 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
average (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊�� ), ), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 values, ��𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤),), respectively
(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ��
��
�𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤�,
), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴�𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
for: �, the ��
��
��
heat are
output thestandard
standard uncertainties
(or colduncertainties
production), inofW; measurement
and the internal of the
the
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒), �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒�� are
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴�𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
�𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 are the
the standard uncertainties of measurement
of measurement of
and
average
average
of the averageexternal values,
values, temperatures
values, respectively
respectively respectivelyfor: of the
for:
for: the body
theheat
the heat(within
heat output
output
output the limits
(or cold
(or
(or cold of a single
cold production),
production),
production), measurement
in W; andin inthe W;
W; and the
and
internal on the basis
the internal
internal
ofandsimultaneous
and external
external
external temperatures
temperatures
temperatures readings of the of ofof the12
the
body body
body
(within (within
(within
thermometers),the limits the
the alimits
of limits in of
single of
K; aaand
single
single
measurement themeasurement
measurement
internal
on the basisand on the
ofon the basis
basis
external
ofof simultaneous
temperatures
simultaneous simultaneous readingsof thereadings readings
body
of 12 thermometers), (steady of 12
of 12
state), thermometers),
thermometers),
inin K; K,
andusing type
the internal in A
in K;
K;
and and the
and
evaluation;
external thetemperatures
internal and
internal and external
of external
temperatures
temperatures
the body (steady of of the body
the
state), body
in K,)using (steady
(steady typestate), state),
A evaluation; in K,
in K, using
using type type AA evaluation;
evaluation;
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are the standard uncertainties of measurement respectively of the
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊),
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
heat
(𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊), output (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
(or ),cold
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖), (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵(𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
production), arethe
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒)) are
are thestandard
the standard
standard
in W; and uncertainties
uncertainties
of the internal
uncertainties of and
of measurement
measurement
of measurement external respectively
respectively
temperatures
respectively of of the
of the
heat
heat
body,
the heat output
output inoutput K, using (or
(or (orcold cold
cold typeproduction), production),
production),
B evaluation; in inW; in W; W; and
and and
of theof ofinternal
the internal
the internal
and external and external
and external temperatures
temperatures temperatures
of the of the
of the
body,inin
body,
body, inK,K, K,
using using
using typetype type B evaluation; BB evaluation;
evaluation;
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ), 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ) are the combined standard uncertainties of the values of the areas respectively
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
of
(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒),
the ),internal (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖)) are
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 are
andthe
are the
the external
combined combined
combined surfaces standard
standard
standard of uncertainties
uncertainties
the
uncertainties body ofofthethe ofvehicle
of
valuestheof
the values
values
thebeing of the
of
areas the areas
areas
tested
respectively respectively
respectively
(disregarding
of the theinternal internal and 22 external
of
corrugation),
of the internal inand
and mexternal ; external surfaces surfaces
surfaces of theof ofbody the of
the body
body the of of thethe vehicle
vehicle vehicle
being being
being
tested tested (disregarding
tested
(disregarding (disregarding
corrugation),
corrugation),
corrugation), in m in in2;m m22;;
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 is the value of the heat output (or cold production) obtained at the kth measurement (in all,
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊k𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘isis
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
when
W isthe the
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓the measurements
value value
value of the of the
of the
heatheat heat
are output output
output
taken (or cold (or
at(or the cold
cold
production) production)
endproduction)
of the steady
obtained obtained
obtained
state,
at the kth atmeasurement
at
for theperiod
the
the kth measurement
kth measurement
of(inmeasurement),
all, (in all,
(in all,
inwhen
when W; 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 measurements
measurements
when measurements are taken at the end of the steady state, for the period of measurement), in W; are are taken
taken at
at the
the end
end of
of the
the steady
steady state,
state, for
for the
the period
period of
of measurement),
measurement),
inin W; W;
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
are 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 , 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 are the
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 the temperatures temperatures measured measured at the the kth kthmeasurement,
measurement,respectively respectively using using instrument
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
iinstrument
on
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ,, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘the𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒interior
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘i on the
𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
are
are thethe
ofinterior temperatures
temperatures
the body of the
of the body measured
measured
of theunder
vehicle at
at the
the
vehicletest kth
kth
under measurement,
measurement,
(intestall,(in
withall,one respectively
respectively
withmeasurement,
one measurement, using
using instrument
instrument
simultaneously
i on
taken on the
isimultaneously the byinterior interior
l uniformly taken of the
of the by body
body
l uniformly
precise ofthermometers)
of theprecise
the vehiclethermometers)
vehicle under
under andtest test (inand
(in all,by
all,
by instrument with
with one
jone
instrument measurement,
measurement,
on the simultaneously
of simultaneously
j on the exterior
exterior the body of the
vehicle
taken
taken
of the body bybyunder ll uniformly
uniformly
of the test vehicle (inprecise all,
precise under with testone
thermometers)
thermometers) (in all, measurement,with one and bysimultaneously
andmeasurement,
by instrument
instrument ontaken
jj on the
simultaneously bytaken
the exterior
exterior m uniformly
ofbythe
of the body
m body precise
of the
of the
thermometers),
vehicle under
vehicle
uniformly underprecisetest testin °C;
(in
thermometers), (in all, all, with withinone one measurement, simultaneously
°C; measurement, simultaneously taken taken by by m m uniformly
uniformly precise precise
thermometers),
thermometers),
� , 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 �𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 , 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are in
in °C; °C;

𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
are the the calculated calculatedaverage average values values (steady
(steady state), respectively,
state), of the heat
respectively, of the output
heat output (or
��,,cold
cold
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
(or �
�𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
production),
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ��𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are
,𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 , production),
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 are the thein calculated
in W;
calculated
W; and andthe the average
average internal
internal values
values
and and external
(steady
(steady
external temperatures of theof
state), respectively,
state),
temperatures respectively, the in
body, body, theinheat
of°C;the
of °C; output
heat output (or (or
cold
cold
�� production),
production),
�� in in W;
W; and
and the
the internal
internal and
and external
temperatures of
of the
the body,
body, in
in °C;
°C;
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 , 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 are the calculated average values (within the limits of the -th measurement), respectively,
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇��
��
of𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘the,, ��𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�� 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 are
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒internal arethe the and calculated
calculated externalaverage average
temperatures valuesof(within
values (within
the body, thelimits
the limits
in °C;of ofthethe-th-thmeasurement),
measurement),respectively, respectively,
ofof the the internal internal and and external external temperatures temperatures of of the
the body,
body, in in °C;
°C;
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 , 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are the calculated average values of the areas, respectively of the internal and external
2
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,, 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are
surfaces are ofthe the
the calculated calculated
body of theaverage average
vehicle being valuestested
values of the
of the(disregarding
areas, respectively
areas, respectively of the
of
corrugation), the internal
internal
in m2. and and external
external
taken taken by lby uniformly precise thermometers) andand
by instrument j onj the exterior of the body of the
taken by ll uniformly
uniformly precise
precise thermometers)
thermometers) and byby instrument
instrument on the
j on the exterior
exterior of the
of the body
body of the
of the
vehicle vehicle under under test (in
test all,
(in with
all, one
with measurement,
one measurement, simultaneously
simultaneously taken by
taken mby uniformly
m precise
uniformly precise
vehicle under test (in all, with one measurement, simultaneously taken by m uniformly precise
thermometers), thermometers), in °C;
in °C;
°C;
thermometers), in
ATP Handbook
� 2021� � 35
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 , 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 �𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤,,, 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
� �𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒,, are
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
� � are
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇� the the
calculated
calculatedaverage values
average (steady
values (steadystate), respectively,
state), respectively, of the heatheat
of the output (or (or
output
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are the calculated average values (steady state), respectively, of the heat output (or
coldcold production), production), in in W; and
in W;
W; and the internal
and the and
the internal external
internal and
and externaltemperatures
temperatures of of the body,
of the in
the body, °C;
body, in
in °C;
°C;
cold production),
��
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 ,�� 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇are
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒,,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘��
�� the the
are calculated
calculated average values
average (within
values the the
(within limits of the
limits -th measurement),
ofofthe
the -th-th
measurement), respectively,
respectively,
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
are 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 are the thecalculated
calculatedaverage
averagevalues
values(within
(withinthethelimits
limitsof -th
the measurement),
measurement),respectively,
of the of theinternal internal and external
and temperatures
external temperaturesof the
of body,
the in
body, °C;
in °C;
of
respectively, the internal and
of the external
internal andtemperatures of the body,
external temperatures of the in °C;in °C;
body,
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ,
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 are are thethecalculated average values ofofthe
the areas, respectively
of theofinternal
the internal andandexternal
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,, 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are
are the
the calculated
calculated
calculated average
average
average values
values
values ofareas,
of the
the areas, respectively
respectively
areas, respectively of the
of the internal
and external
internal
2
external
and external
surfaces surfacesofof
surfaces of the body
ofthe
the
body of
body the
of thevehicle
of the
the being
vehicle
vehicle being tested
being (disregarding
tested
testedtested corrugation),
(disregarding
(disregarding corrugation),
corrugation), in m .2 in m . 22
in mm ..
surfaces the body of vehicle being (disregarding corrugation), in
∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1
� =
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 �
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = ∑ 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
�
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1 ∑𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=1 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
∑ ∑ ∑𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=1 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
�𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 =𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 � = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=1 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
�
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∙ 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∙ 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1 ∑𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ∙𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
∑ 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗=1 ∑𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = � 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘=1 ∑𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗=1 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗=1 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
� =
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∙ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∙
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 ∙ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
∑𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=1 ∑𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=1
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
��
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 �� =
�� ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 =
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖=1 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
∑𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗=1 ∑𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
��
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = ∑ 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗=1 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘��
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
=
𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗=1 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗,𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
If the If theheatheat heat output output (or
(or (or cold
coldcold production)
production) of
of the the heat
heatheat exchangers has
exchangers hasbeen beenbeendetermined
determined onon thethe basis
If the
If the heat output
output (or cold energy production)
production) of the
of the heat exchangers exchangers has
has determined
been determined on the
on the basis
basis
of the basis of
values the values of
of electric electric energy consumption
consumption consumed
consumed by the
by by heat
the the exchangers,
heatheat exchangers, then the thenthen the the
of
of the
the valuesdependence values of electric
of electric energy
energy consumption
consumption consumed
consumed by theareheat exchangers,
exchangers, then the
mathematical mathematical dependence ononthe thebasis basisof of which the therequired calculations carried out must
mathematical
mathematical dependence
dependence on the
on the basis basiswhich of of which which required
the
the required
required
calculations calculations
calculations
are carried
are
are carried
carried
out out
out
must must
must
be be
be
factored be factored into intofinal
the the final
result result
of of
the the uncertaintyuncertaintyas as well. well.
factored into
factored into the the final
final result
result of of the the uncertainty uncertainty as as well. well.
Section Section 4.34.3 of ofISO/IEC
ISO/IEC GuideGuide 98-3:2008 98-3:2008 addresses addresses the evaluation the the evaluation of standard of standard uncertainties
uncertainties for for for
Section
Section 4.3
4.3 of ISO/IEC
of ISO/IEC Guide
Guide 98-3:2008
98-3:2008 addresses
addresses the evaluation
evaluation of standard
of standard uncertainties
uncertainties for
typetype type BB B evaluation.In
evaluation.
B evaluation.evaluation. In In this
this commentary
In this commentary
this commentary commentary we wewe provide provide
we provide a design
provide aa design a design formula
design formula to obtain
formulaformula to to the standard
obtain
to obtain
obtain the the standard
the standard standard
type
uncertainty
uncertainty uncertainty onon onthe
the basisof
basis
the basisof known
known boundaries
of known known boundaries boundaries (upper (upper andand
(upper lower
andlower limits)
lower for thefor
limits)
limits) evaluation
the the
for evaluation of the of the
evaluation of the
the
uncertainty
measured physical on the basis
values. of
Such situations boundaries often occur(upper in practice and and lower limits)
correspond for
withthe concepts evaluation of
measured measured physical physical values.
values. Such
Such situations situations - often often
38 often
-38occur occur occur in in practice
practice and and correspond
correspond with with concepts
concepts
measured such physical as the accuracy values. Such
class of situations
the instrumentation -- 38 -- and in itspracticemargin ofand error.correspond
If the interval with of concepts
the
such as such as as the accuracy the accuracyaccuracy class
class of of
ofphysical the
the instrumentation instrumentation
instrumentation and its and its its margin
margin of
of error.error.
error. IfIf If
thetheinterval interval ofof thethe
such the
evaluations class
of measured the values, x, is denoted and asmargin2a (corresponding of tothethe interval
commonof the
evaluations evaluations offor of measured
measured physical
physical values, values, x, is x, is denotedisdenoted denoted as
as 2a 2a 2a (corresponding
(corresponding to to the to the commonthe common common
evaluations notation of measured
the marginphysical of error ofvalues, the instrumentation x, as ±a), as then: (corresponding
notation notation for for the the margin
margin of of error
error of of the the instrumentation
instrumentation as as ±a),±a), then: then:
notation for the margin of error of the instrumentation as ±a), then:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢(𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥)
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥) = =𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵(𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥) = √3
√3√3
�𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤S𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 �𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 can
2.2.Under
2. Under Under
2. Under normal
normal
normal normal
test
test
test conditions,
conditions,
test conditions,
conditions, 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆�𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆� 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 i and ��𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆Scan
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 can
e
can
bebebe be measured
measured
measured
measured with
with
with
with ahigh
aaahigh
high
high degree
degree
degree
degree ofof
of
of accuracy.
accuracy.
accuracy.
accuracy. The
The
The
combined combined The combined standard
standard uncertainty uncertainty
uncertainty
standard for such
uncertainty for suchfor such conditions conditions
such conditions may be may bemay be accepted
acceptedbe accepted as
as equal equal
equal to
to ±± 1%.
as equal ±1%. 1%.
to ±However, However,
However,
1%.
combined standard for conditions may accepted as to
there are there are
are cases
However, casesthere cases where
where it
areititcases is impossible
is impossible
impossible
where it is impossible to
to measure measure measure to with with this
measure with thiswiththis precision.
precision.
this precision.
there where is to precision.
Generally, Generally, Generally, the
the following following
following
the following method
method
method may may
may bebe be used usedtoused to
totodeterminedetermine determine
determine the the
thecombined
the combinedcombined standard
standard
standard uncertainty
uncertainty uncertainty ofof
Generally, the method may be used combined standard uncertainty of
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
of𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆S𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒i 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆and
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ,which
,which are areusedused toto todetermine
determine thethe heat heat transfer transfer surface
surface area area of
ofthethe the body,
body, 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆.𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆.
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ,which Se , which
are are
used used
to determine determine the the heat heat transfer transfer surface
surface area
area ofof the body,
body, S. 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆.
If 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆are Seare presented asfunctions functionsof of aseries series ofrepeated repeatedmeasurements, measurements, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
p𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 e𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (for
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒(for
IfIf 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
If Si 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 and 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒are presented
are presented
presented asas
as functions functions ofof aa series series ofof ofrepeated repeatedmeasurements, measurements, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
pi and (for𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (for
example, example, example, of the of the
theoflength, length,
length,
the length, width
widthwidth and
andand height height
height measured measured
measuredat atatvariousat various various
various places places
placesinin in in
thethe the
body bodybody of the
of the of thevehicle):the vehicle):
vehicle):
example, of width and height measured places the body of vehicle):
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆= 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
1 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖, 1𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖, 2… ,… , 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖,𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦…, … , 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖�𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 �
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓11 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖11, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖22, … , 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦, … , 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌�
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆=
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
2 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒, 1𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒, 2…,…
, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒, 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧…, …
, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒�𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 �
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓22�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒11, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒22, … , 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧, … , 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍�
then
then their
their
then combined
combined
their combinedstandard
uncertainties can
can can be be calculated
becalculated
calculated according according
according
to the to
thethe
toformulae: formulae:
formulae:
then their combined standard uncertainties can be calculated according to the formulae:
𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 2
𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓122
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ) = �� 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 � 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
∙ 11 � �
(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 )
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖) =
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖= ��
�� 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦��𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦∙∙ 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
�
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦=1 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦=1
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦=1
𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 2
𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓222
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ) = � � �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 � 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
∙ 22 � �
(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 �� 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒))𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒= �
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒�𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧∙
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = � �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧� ∙ 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝�
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1
where: where:
where:
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
1 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2
are respectively
11 , 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
,
, 22 are
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 respectively
are respectively
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
thethe
the
partial
partial
partial
derivatives
derivatives
derivatives forfor
for thethe
the
functions
functions
functions forfor
for
calculating
calculating
calculating
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ;
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒;; 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �,
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 � are
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒�𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧are thethe combined
combined standard
uncertainties forfor
thethe parameters
parameters 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖�,
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 �, 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 � are the combined standard uncertainties for the parameters 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦=1 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦=1
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦=1 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 2 2
𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2 2
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ) (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
= 𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 �) �= � �
�𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍
𝑍𝑍𝑍𝑍 �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
� ∙ � ∙
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧�2∙ 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
� 2 �2
2
36 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒) = ��𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝2𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2 �
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒∙ 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒2 ATP Handbook 2021
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ) =𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�(𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆� 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
) =
�𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢�
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1 �
�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1 �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
� ∙ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 �
� 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 �
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧=1 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
where: where:
where:
where: 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓1 where:where:
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 12 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2
, 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 1 , are 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2 respectively are respectively the partial
the partial derivatives
derivatives forfunctions
for the the functions for calculating
for calculating 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ; 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ;
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒22𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 are respectively the partial derivatives for the functions for calculating 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ;
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓1𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖1𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧, 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓1 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓2
, 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝are 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 , 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 respectively
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 are respectively
respectively the
the partial
partial derivatives
derivatives for for
the the functions
functions for for calculating
calculating S and S
the partial derivatives for the functions for calculating 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆i𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎e;𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ;𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒;
𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜕𝜕𝜕𝜕𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �, �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �, �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ��𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝are�the arecombined
the combined standard
uncertainties forparameters
for the the parameters 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�, 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧� are the combined standard uncertainties for the parameters 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �,𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧�,� 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢are
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝the are thecombined
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧�combined
are the combined
standard standard
uncertainties
uncertainties forparameters
the parameters
forparameters
for the the 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦Pi𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝P z 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
y and𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒e𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
2 2
∑𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 ∑�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝− 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�� − 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �� 2
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2 2 2
� 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 �∑𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2−
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�� 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤
2
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�= ∑𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉� =�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖∑𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 − 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
− 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�� 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 �� 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤+ 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵+�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
� 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �222
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 � = �𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 ∙ (𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 − ∙𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤(𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦1)
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣− 1) 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢2 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢=𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � = 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 ∙ (𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 −+1)𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖+�𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 ∙ (𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 − 1) 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 ∙ (𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 − 1) 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
∑𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1∑𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
∑𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦∑=
�� 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝= ∑𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉��
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 =𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
��
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣=1
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 = ��
�� 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 =𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
where: where: 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
where:
where: where:
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 isquantity the quantity of measurements carried
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 is the where: of measurements carried out toout to determine
determine the average the average valuevalue of parameter
of parameter 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ; 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ;
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 is the quantity of measurements carried out to determine the average value of parameter 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ;
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 is the quantity 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 is the quantity
of measurements of measurements
carried out carried to determine out to determine the average the average
value of value of
parameter parameter
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ; 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦;
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 V𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝is𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖is𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦the theismeasured the measured
quantity of value value
measurements of parameter
of parameter
carried𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝out 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 at 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 the
to at-th
determine themeasurement; -th themeasurement;
average value of parameter 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 is the measured value of parameter 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 at the -th measurement;
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 is the 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
Pi𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖y𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦measured is the measured
valuevalue value of parameter
of parameter 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦Piatatthe 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖-th atmeasurement;
the -th measurement;
v 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
is𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 the measured of parameter y
the 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 measurement;
-th
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝is the � isstandard the standard uncertainty
uncertainty parameter parameter 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 evaluated
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 evaluated for type for B type (forBdetails
(for details on evaluation
on evaluation
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� isis the
the standard standarduncertainty
standard uncertainty parameter
parameter 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 evaluated
evaluated for type Bfor for(fortype type B (for
details details on evaluation
on evaluation
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 methods 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
methods
is𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 the
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �methods
�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 and � is
techniques
standard
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 the
and techniques uncertainty
forparameter
for type
uncertainty type
B uncertainties, parameter
B uncertainties, 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 evaluated 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
see 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖section see for
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 evaluated
section 4.3 ofB
type 4.3 ISO/IEC
(for of details B (for
ISO/IEC details
onGuide
Guide on
98-3:2008).
98-3:2008).
evaluation evaluation
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 and 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
methods andtechniques techniques forfor
typetype B uncertainties,
B uncertainties, see section see section
4.3 of ISO/IEC 4.3 of Guide ISO/IEC Guide 98-3:2008).
98-3:2008).
methods methods and techniques and techniques for type B foruncertainties,
type B uncertainties, see section see4.3 section
of ISO/IEC 4.3 of ISO/IEC Guide 98-3:2008).
Guide 98-3:2008).
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�� 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�� 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ��𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝are arecalculated
are calculated
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �calculated in
in ainfashion
a a fashion
fashion similar
similar similar to
to 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒to
��𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
��𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�.. 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 �.
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�� 𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � are calculated in a fashion similar to 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
��𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 �.
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
��𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 3.
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
��
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝚤𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 � 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢are
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝calculated
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � are calculated
in a fashionin asimilar fashiontosimilar 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
��𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
to 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ��𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒�.
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧�.
Other 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 uncertainties which have not been taken into 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 consideration 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 can have an effect on
accuracy in determining the K coefficient.
(a) Latent errors due to admissible variations in the internal and external temperatures, which
are a function of the thermal inertia of the walls of the equipment, the temperature and time;
- 39 -- 39 -
(b) Uncertainties due to the variation-of 39air
- velocity at the boundary layer and its effect
- 39 - - 39 -
on the thermal resistance.
If the internal and external air velocities are of equal value, the possible expanded uncertainty
will be about 2.5% as between 1 and 2 m/s for a mean K coefficient of 0.40 W/m2.°C. For a K
coefficient of 0.70 W/m2.°C, this expanded uncertainty will be nearly 5%. If there are significant
thermal bridges, the influence of the speed and direction of the air will be greater.
3. EFFECTIVENESS OF THERMAL APPLIANCES OF EQUIPMENT

Procedures for determining the efficiency of thermal appliances of equipment
3.1 Refrigerated equipment

3.1.1 The empty equipment shall be placed in an insulated chamber whose mean temperature shall be kept
uniform, and constant to within ± 0.5 °C, at + 30 °C. The mass of air in the chamber shall be made to
circulate as described in paragraph 2.1.5 of this appendix.
body at the points specified in paragraphs 1.3 and 1.4 of this appendix.
Test procedure
3.1.3 (a) In the case of equipment other than equipment with fixed eutectic plates, and equipment
fitted with liquefied gas systems, the maximum weight of refrigerant specified by the manufacturer
or which can normally be accommodated shall be loaded into the spaces provided when the mean
inside temperature of the body has reached the mean outside temperature of the body (+ 30 °C).
Doors, hatches and other openings shall be closed and the inside ventilation appliances (if any) of the
equipment shall be started up at maximum capacity. In addition, in the case of new equipment, a
heating appliance with a heating capacity equal to 35% of the heat exchanged through the walls in
continuous operation shall be started up inside the body when the temperature prescribed for the
class to which the equipment is presumed to belong has been reached. No additional refrigerant shall
be loaded during the test;
(b) In the case of equipment with fixed eutectic plates, the test shall comprise a preliminary phase of
freezing of the eutectic solution. For this purpose, when the mean inside temperature of the body
and the temperature of the plates have reached the mean outside temperature (+ 30 °C), the plate-
cooling appliance shall be put into operation for 18 consecutive hours after closure of the doors and
hatches. If the plate-cooling appliance includes a cyclically-operating mechanism, the total duration
of operation of the appliance shall be 24 hours. In the case of new equipment, as soon as the cooling
appliance is stopped, a heating appliance with a heating capacity equal to 35% of the heat exchanged
through the walls in continuous operation shall be started up inside the body when the temperature
prescribed for the class to which the equipment is presumed to belong has been reached. The
solution shall not be subjected to any re-freezing operation during the test;
(c) In the case of equipment fitted with liquefied gas systems, the following test procedure shall be
used: when the mean inside temperature of the body has reached the mean outside temperature (+
30 °C), the receptacles for the liquefied gas shall be filled to the level prescribed by the manufacturer.
Then the doors, hatches and other openings shall be closed as in normal operation and the inside
ventilation appliances (if any) of the equipment shall be started up at maximum capacity. The
thermostat shall be set at a temperature not more than 2 degrees below the limit temperature of the
presumed class of the equipment. Cooling of the body then shall be commenced. During the cooling
of the body the refrigerant consumed is simultaneously replaced. This replacement shall be effected:
either for a time corresponding to the interval between the commencement of cooling and the
moment when the temperature prescribed for the class to which the equipment is presumed
to belong is reached for the first time; or
for a duration of three hours counting from the commencement of cooling, whichever is
shorter.
Beyond this period, no additional refrigerant shall be loaded during the test.
In the case of new equipment, a heating appliance with a heating capacity equal to 35% of the heat
exchanged through the walls in continuous operation shall be started up inside the body when the
class temperature has been reached.
Provisions common to all types of refrigerated equipment
every 5 minutes.
3.1.5 The test shall be continued for 12 hours after the mean inside temperature of the body has reached the
lower limit prescribed for the class to which the equipment is presumed to belong (A = +7 °C; B = -10 °C;
C = -20 °C; D = 0 °C) or, in the case of equipment with fixed eutectic plates, after stoppage of the cooling
appliance.
Criterion of satisfaction
3.1.6
The test shall be deemed satisfactory if the mean inside temperature of the body does not exceed
the aforesaid lower limit during the aforesaid period of 12 hours.
3.1.7
If a refrigerating appliance of paragraph 3.1.3 (c) with all its accessories has undergone separately, to
the satisfaction of the competent authority, the test in section 9 of this appendix to determine its
effective refrigerating capacity at the prescribed reference temperatures, the transport
equipment may be accepted as refrigerated equipment without undergoing an efficiency test if the
effective refrigerating capacity of the appliance in continuous operation exceeds the heat loss
through the walls for the class under consideration, multiplied by the factor 1,75.
3.1.8
If the refrigerating appliance is replaced by a unit of a different type, the competent authority may:
(a) Require the equipment to undergo the determinations and verifications prescribed in
paragraphs 3.1.3 to 3.1.5; or
(b) Satisfy itself that the effective refrigerating capacity of the new refrigerating appliance is, at the
temperature prescribed for equipment of the class concerned, at least equal to that of the unit
replaced; or
(c) Satisfy itself that the effective refrigerating capacity of the new refrigerating appliance meets the
requirements of paragraph 3.1.7.
3.1.9 A refrigerating unit working with liquefied gas is regarded as being of the same type as the unit tested if:
(a) The same refrigerant is used;
(b) The evaporator has the same capacity;
(c) The regulation system has the same characteristics;
(d) The liquefied gas tank has the same design and its capacity is equal or upper to the capacity stated
in the test report.
The diameters and the technology of the supply lines are identical.
3.2 Mechanically refrigerated equipment

Test method
3.2.1 The test shall be carried out in the conditions described in paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 of this appendix.
Test procedure
3.2.2 When the mean inside temperature of the body reaches the outside temperature (+ 30 °C), the doors,
hatches and other openings shall be closed and the refrigerating appliance and the inside ventilating
appliances (if any) shall be started up at maximum capacity. In addition, in the case of new equipment,
a heating appliance with a heating capacity equal to 35% of the heat exchanged through the walls in
continuous operation shall be started up inside the body when the temperature prescribed for the class
to which the equipment is presumed to belong has been reached.
every 5 minutes.
3.2.4 The test shall be continued for 12 hours after the mean inside temperature of the body has reached:
either the lower limit prescribed for the class to which the equipment is presumed to belong in
the case of classes A, B and C (A = 0 °C; B = -10 °C; C = -20 °C); or
a level not lower than the upper limit prescribed for the class to which the equipment is
presumed to belong in the case of classes D, E, and F (D = 0 °C; E = -10 °C; F = -20 °C).
3.2.5 The test shall be deemed satisfactory if the refrigerating appliance is able to maintain the prescribed
temperature conditions during the said 12-hour periods, with any automatic defrosting of the
refrigerating unit not being taken into account.
3.2.6 If the refrigerating appliance with all its accessories has undergone separately, to the satisfaction of
the competent authority, a test to determine its effective refrigerating capacity at the prescribed
reference temperatures, the transport equipment may be accepted as mechanically refrigerated
equipment without undergoing an efficiency test if the effective refrigerating capacity of the
appliance in continuous operation exceeds the heat loss through the walls for the class under
consideration, multiplied by the factor 1.75.
Comment to paragraph 3.2.6:

The proposed provision concerning the use of a multiplier factor of 1.75 when determining the
refrigerating capacity of the appliance to be installed on a body, is to be applicable whether or not the
body was fitted with an appliance when the K coefficient was measured. If during the insulation test
the body was not equipped with an appliance, it would be advisable to ensure that the K coefficient of
that body when equipped with an appliance does not exceed the class limits, in order to allow for the
variations that might occur with equipment of differing lengths or types.
3.2.7 If the mechanically refrigerating unit is replaced by a unit of a different type, the competent authority
may:
(a) require the equipment to undergo the determinations and verifications prescribed in
paragraphs 3.2.1 to 3.2.4; or
(b) satisfy itself that the effective refrigerating capacity of the new mechanically refrigerating
unit is, at the temperature prescribed for equipment of the class concerned, at least equal to
that of the unit replaced; or
(c) satisfy itself that the effective refrigerating capacity of the new mechanically refrigerating unit
meets the requirements of paragraph 3.2.6.
3.3 Heated equipment

Test method
3.3.1 The empty equipment shall be placed in an insulated chamber whose temperature shall be kept uniform
and constant at as low a level as possible. The atmosphere of the chamber shall be made to circulate as
described in paragraph 2.1.5 of this appendix.
body at the points specified in paragraphs 1.3 and 1.4 of this appendix.
Test procedure
3.3.3 Doors, hatches and other openings shall be closed and the heating equipment and the inside ventilating
appliances (if any) shall be started up at maximum capacity.
every 5 minutes.
3.3.5 The test shall be continued for 12 hours after the difference between the mean inside temperature
and the mean outside temperature of the body has reached the level corresponding to the conditions
prescribed for the class to which the equipment is presumed to belong. In the case of new equipment,
the above temperature difference shall be increased by 35 per cent.
3.3.6 The test shall be deemed satisfactory if the heating appliance is able to maintain the prescribed
temperature difference during the 12 hours aforesaid.
3.4 Mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment

Test method
3.4.1 The test shall be carried out in two stages. The efficiency of the refrigeration unit of the refrigerating
or refrigerating-heating appliance is determined in the first stage and that of the heating appliance is
determined in the second stage.
3.4.2 In the first stage, the test shall be carried out in the conditions described in paragraphs 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 of
this appendix; in the second stage, it shall be carried out in the conditions described in paragraphs 3.3.1
and 3.3.2 of this appendix.
Test procedure
3.4.3 (a) The general procedure for measuring the effective refrigerating capacity of mechanically
refrigerated appliances stipulated in paragraph 4.1 and 4.2 shall be applied after adapting it such
that it can be used to measure heating appliances using a calorimeter box.
The temperature at the air inlet of the thermal appliance or at the air inlet of the evaporator inside
the calorimeter box shall be +12 °C.
For the measurement of the effective heating capacities of classes A, E and I, one test at a mean
outside temperature (Te) of -10 °C shall be carried out.
For the measurement of the effective heating capacities of classes B, F and J, tests at two mean
outside temperatures (Te) shall be carried out: one at -10 °C and the other at -20 °C.
For the measurement of the effective heating capacities of classes C, D, G, H, K, or L, three tests shall
be carried out. One test at a mean outside temperature (Te) of -10 °C, another test at the minimum
outside temperature required by the class and one test at an intermediate outside temperature to
allow an interpolation for the effective heating capacities for other in-between class temperatures.
For purely electric heating systems a minimum of one test shall be carried out to measure the
effective heating capacities of classes A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K or L. This test should be carried out
at +12 °C at the air inlet of the evaporator and the minimum outside temperature required by the
class.
(i) If the measurement of the effective heating capacity is carried out at the lowest outside
temperature required by the class, no further test shall be required.
(ii) If the measurement of the effective heating capacity is not carried out at the lowest temperature
required by the class, an additional functional test of the heating appliance shall be carried out.
This functional test shall be done at the minimum temperature required by the class (e.g. -40 °C
for class L) to verify that the heating appliance and its drive system (e.g. diesel engine driven
generator) starts and works properly at the lowest temperature.
(b) When the measurement is carried out on equipment, the basic requirements for the test procedure
for the first stage are described in paragraphs 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 of this appendix; those for the second
stage are described in paragraphs 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 of this appendix.
3.4.4 The second stage of the test may be initiated immediately after the end of the first stage, without the
measuring equipment being dismantled.
3.4.5 In each stage, the test shall be continued for 12 hours after:
(a) in the first stage, the mean inside temperature of the body has reached the lower limit prescribed
for the class to which the equipment is presumed to belong;
(b) in the second stage, the difference between the mean inside temperature of the body and the mean
outside temperature of the body has reached the level corresponding to the conditions prescribed
for the class to which the equipment is presumed to belong. In the case of new equipment, the
above temperature difference shall be increased by 35 per cent.
3.4.6 The results of the test shall be deemed satisfactory if:
(a) in the first stage, the refrigerating or refrigerating-heating appliance is able to maintain the
prescribed temperature conditions during the said 12-hour period, with any automatic defrosting
of the refrigerating or refrigerating-heating unit not being taken into account;
(b) in the second stage, the heating appliance is able to maintain the prescribed temperature difference
during the said 12-hour period.
3.4.7 If the refrigerating unit of the refrigerating or refrigerating-heating appliance with all its accessories has
undergone separately, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, a test to determine its effective
refrigerating capacity at the prescribed reference temperatures, the transport equipment may be
accepted as having passed the first stage of the test without undergoing an efficiency test if the effective
refrigerating capacity of the appliance in continuous operation exceeds the heat loss through the walls
for the class under consideration, multiplied by the factor 1.75.
3.4.8 If the mechanically refrigerating unit of the refrigerating or refrigerating-heating appliance is replaced by
a unit of a different type, the competent authority may:
(a) require the equipment to undergo the determinations and verifications for the first stage of testing
prescribed in paragraphs 3.4.1–3.4.5 of this appendix; or
(b) satisfy itself that the effective refrigerating capacity of the new mechanically refrigerating unit is, at
the temperature prescribed for equipment of the class concerned, at least equal to that of the unit
replaced; or
(c) satisfy itself that the effective refrigerating capacity of the new mechanically refrigerating unit
meets the requirements of paragraph 3.4.7 of this appendix.
4. PROCEDURE FOR MEASURING THE EFFECTIVE REFRIGERATING

CAPACITY Wo OF A UNIT WHEN THE EVAPORATOR IS FREE FROM FROST
4.1 General principles
4.1.1 When attached to either a calorimeter box or the insulated body of a unit of transport equipment, and
operating continuously, this capacity is:
Wo=Wj + U. ∆T
where U is the heat leakage of the calorimeter box or insulated body, Watts/°C.
∆ T is the difference between the mean inside temperature Ti and the mean outside temperature Te of the
calorimeter or insulated body (°C),
Wj is the heat dissipated by the fan heater unit to maintain each temperature difference in equilibrium.
4.2 Test method

4.2.1 The refrigeration unit is either fitted to a calorimeter box or the insulated body of a unit of transport
equipment.
In each case,
In each the the
case, heat leakage
heat is measured
leakage is measured at at
a single mean
a single meanwall temperature
wall temperatureprior
priortotothe
thecapacity
capacitytest.
An arithmetical correction
test. An arithmetical factor, based
correction upon
factor, theupon
based experience of the testing
the experience of thestation,
testing isstation,
made is to made
take into
to take
account theinto account
average the averageoftemperature
temperature the walls at of the thermal
each walls at equilibrium
each thermal equilibrium
during during the of
the determination
the determination of the effective
effective refrigerating capacity.refrigerating capacity.
It is Itpreferable
is preferable to use
to use a calibrated
a calibrated calorimeter
calorimeter box box to obtain
to obtain maximum
maximum accuracy.
accuracy.
Measurements
Measurements andand procedureshall
procedure shallbebeasasdescribed
described in paragraphs
paragraphs1.1 1.1 toto2.1.8
2.1.8 above;
above;however,
however,itit is
is sufficient
sufficient to measure
to measure U theleakage
U the heat heat leakage only,
only, the the of
value value
this of this coefficient
coefficient being defined
being defined by the by the
following
following
relationship: relationship:
W
U=
∆Tm
where:
W is the heating power (in Watts) dissipated by the internal heater and fans;
ΔTm is the difference between the mean internal temperature Ti and the mean external temperature
Te;
U is the heat flow per degree of difference between the air temperature inside and outside the
calorimeter box or unit of transport equipment measured with the refrigeration unit fitted.
where:
W is the heating power (in Watts) dissipated by the internal heater and fans;
ΔTm is the difference between the mean internal temperature Ti and the mean external temperature Te ;
U is the heat flow per degree of difference between the air temperature inside and outside the calorimeter
box or unit of transport equipment measured with the refrigeration unit fitted.
The calorimeter box or unit of transport equipment is placed in a test chamber. If a calorimeter box is
used, U.ΔT should be not more than 35% of the effective refrigerating capacity Wo .
The calorimeter box or unit of transport equipment shall be at least normally insulated.

The U factor of a calorimeter box is usually measured without the refrigeration unit fitted to the
aperture. In the case of a unit of transport equipment, measurement of U may be made with or without
the refrigeration unit fitted to the insulated body, in the absence of a refrigeration unit an insulated
panel is fitted to the aperture.
4.2.2 Instrumentation
Test stations shall be equipped with instruments to measure the U value to an accuracy of ± 5%. Heat
transfer through air leakage should not exceed 5% of the total heat transfer through the calorimeter box
or through the insulated body of the unit of transport equipment. The refrigerating capacity shall be
determined with an accuracy of ± 5%.
The instrumentation of the calorimeter box or unit of transport equipment shall conform to paragraphs 1.3
and 1.4 above. The following are to be measured:
(a) Air temperatures: At least four thermometers uniformly distributed at the inlet to the evaporator;
At least four thermometers uniformly distributed at the outlet to the evaporator;
At least four thermometers uniformly distributed at the air inlet(s) to the refrigeration unit;
The thermometers shall be protected against radiation.
The accuracy of the temperature measuring system shall be ±0.2 °C;
(b) Energy consumption: Instruments shall be provided to measure the electrical energy or fuel
consumption of the refrigeration unit.
The electrical energy and fuel consumption shall be determined with an accuracy of ±0.5%;
Comment to paragraph 4.2.2 (b)

1. This procedure describesåå the measurement method for determining the fuel consumption
of vehicle powered refrigeration units, or in other words the increase in diesel engine fuel
consumption when the refrigeration unit is on.
2. Three standards have been introduced and used to determine the increase in fuel
consumption as a result of the operation of the refrigeration unit:
• Standard diesel engine with standard specific fuel consumption: cs = 165 g/(kW. h).
• Standard vehicle alternator efficiency: ε = 50 %.
• Standard diesel fuel specific density: ρ = 836 g/l.
3. The most frequent arrangement is assumed: the refrigeration compressor or a special
electric generator supplying the refrigeration unit is driven from the vehicle engine crankshaft
(usually by a belt drive). Using a suitable design of power pack in the test station, the torque τ
[N.m] and operating rotational speed n [s-1] are measured and the input power P1 [W] on the
shaft of the compressor or generator is calculated.
P1 [W] = 2πnτ ... where π = 3.141593
4. There are also vehicle-powered units taking in addition electric current from the standard (or
auxiliary) vehicle alternator, or from vehicle batteries, usually to drive electric fans and blowers.
Regarding the shaft power P2 [W] of a standard or auxiliary alternator determined from electric
measurement, the efficiency of such vehicle alternators has to be considered (usually 24 V dc,
100 A to 150 A). Alternator efficiency ε for these calculations is postulated at 50 % (see the second
of the three standards mentioned above). Accordingly, if Pfans is the total electric input needed
to drive the fans, the alternator shaft input is:
P2 = 2 x Pfans
5. In this case the total input power P [W] that the vehicle engine has to deliver to the
refrigeration unit consists of the compressor input P1 and of the alternator input P2 for the fans:
P = P1 + P2
6. If P [W] is the total refrigeration unit input power at specific operating conditions, then the
fuel consumption by weight Cfw [g/h] of the tested refrigeration unit can be calculated as:
Cfw [g/h] = P x cs = 0.165 x P.
7. The consumption by weight (measured in g/h) can be converted to consumption by
volume (measured in l/h) if the specific density ρ of the diesel fuel is known. This density varies
from 830 kg/m3 (winter) to 842 kg/m3 (summer). The standard (mean) value of the specific
density ρ = 836 kg/m3 = 836 g/l has been used for the purposes of this procedure (see the third
of the standards mentioned above).
Cfvol [l/h]= Cfw / 836
8. It is beneficial to introduce specific fuel consumption; it is the quantity which can be used to
compare the economy of units with different refrigeration capacities. Specific fuel consumption
cfvol (consumption by volume reduced to 1 kW of refrigeration capacity Q) is defined in this way:
cfvol [l/(h. kW)] =1000 Cfvol /Q
(c) Speed of rotation: Instruments shall be provided to measure the speed of rotation of the
compressors and circulating fans or to allow these speeds to be calculated where direct
measurement is impractical.
The speed of rotation shall be measured to an accuracy of ±1%;
(d) Pressure: High precision pressure gauges (accurate to ± 1%) shall be fitted to the condenser and
evaporator and to the compressor inlet when the evaporator is fitted with a pressure regulator.
4.2.3 Test conditions
(a) The average air temperature at the inlet(s) to the refrigeration unit shall be maintained at
30 °C ± 0.5 °C.
The maximum difference between the temperatures at the warmest and at the coldest points shall
not exceed 2 °C.
(b) Inside the calorimeter box or the insulated body of the unit of transport equipment (at the air inlet
to the evaporator): there shall be three levels of temperature between -25 °C and +12 °C
depending on the characteristics of the unit, one temperature level being at the minimum
prescribed for the class requested by the manufacturer with a tolerance of ± 1 °C.
The mean inside temperature shall be maintained within a tolerance of ± 0.5 °C. During the measurement
of refrigerating capacity, the heat dissipated within the calorimeter box or the insulated body of the unit
of transport equipment shall be maintained at a constant level with a tolerance of ± 1%.
When presenting a refrigeration unit for test, the manufacturer shall supply:
– Documents describing the unit to be tested;
– A technical document outlining the parameters that are most important to the functioning of the
unit and specifying their allowable range;
– The characteristics of the equipment series tested; and
– A statement as to which prime mover(s) shall be used during testing.
4.3 Test procedure

4.3.1 The test shall be divided into two major parts, the cooling phase and the measurement of the effective
refrigerating capacity at three increasing temperature levels.
(a) Cooling phase; the initial temperature of the calorimeter box or transport equipment shall be 30 °C
± 3 °C. It shall then be lowered to the following temperatures: -25 °C for -20 °C class, -13 °C for -10 °C
class or -2 °C for 0 °C class;
(b) Measurement of effective refrigerating capacity, at each internal temperature level.
A first test to be carried out, for at least four hours at each level of temperature, under control of the
thermostat (of the refrigeration unit) to stabilize the heat transfer between the interior and exterior
of the calorimeter box or unit of transport equipment.
A second test shall be carried out without the thermostat in operation in order to determine the
maximum refrigerating capacity, with the heating power of the internal heater producing an
equilibrium condition at each temperature level as prescribed in paragraph 4.2.3.
The duration of the second test shall be not less than four hours.
Before changing from one temperature level to another, the box or unit shall be manually defrosted.
If the refrigeration unit can be operated by more than one form of energy, the tests shall be
repeated accordingly.
If the compressor is driven by the vehicle engine, the test shall be carried out at both the minimum
speed and at the nominal speed of rotation of the compressor as specified by the manufacturer.
If the compressor is driven by the vehicle motion, the test shall be carried out at the nominal speed
of rotation of the compressor as specified by the manufacturer.
4.3.2 The same procedure shall be followed for the enthalpy method described below, but in this case the heat
power dissipated by the evaporator fans at each temperature level shall also be measured.
This method may, alternatively, be used to test reference equipment. In this case, the effective refrigerating
capacity is measured by multiplying the mass flow (m) of the refrigerant liquid by the difference in
enthalpy between the refrigerant vapour leaving the unit (ho) and the liquid at the inlet to the unit (hi).
To obtain the effective refrigerating capacity, the heat generated by the evaporator fans (Wf ) is deducted.
It is difficult to measure Wf if the evaporator fans are driven by an external motor, in this particular case
the enthalpy method is not recommended. When the fans are driven by internal electric motors, the
electrical power is measured by appropriate instruments with an accuracy of ± 3%, with refrigerant flow
measurement being accurate to ± 3%.
The heat balance is given by the formula:
Wo = (ho hi) m Wf.
An electric heater is placed inside the equipment in order to obtain the thermal equilibrium.
4.3.3 Precautions
As the tests for effective refrigerating capacity are carried out with the thermostat of the refrigeration unit
disconnected, the following precautions shall be observed:
If the equipment has a hot gas injection system, it shall be inoperative during the test;
with automatic controls of the refrigeration unit which unload individual cylinders (to tune the
capacity of the refrigeration unit to motor output) the test shall be carried out with the number of
cylinders appropriate for the temperature.
4.3.4 Checks
The following should be verified and the methods used indicated on the test report:
(a) the defrosting system and the thermostat are functioning correctly;
(b) the rate of air circulation shall be measured using an existing standard;
If the air circulation of a refrigeration unit’s evaporator fans is to be measured, methods capable of
measuring the total delivery volume shall be used. Use of one of the relevant existing standards, i.e.
ISO 5801: 2017 and AMCA 210-16 is recommended;
(c) the refrigerant used for tests is that specified by the manufacturer.
4.4 Test result

4.4.1 The refrigeration capacity for ATP purposes is that relating to the mean temperature at the inlet(s) of the
evaporator. The temperature measuring instruments shall be protected against radiation.
4.5 Procedure for testing mechanically refrigeration units if there is a change

of refrigerants
4.5.1 General principles
The test is in line with the procedure described in section 4, paragraphs 4.1 to 4.4 and based on a complete
test of the refrigeration unit with one refrigerant, the reference refrigerant.
The refrigeration unit, its refrigeration circuit and the components of the refrigeration circuit shall not be
different when using replacement refrigerants. Only very limited modifications are permitted that are:
(a) Modification and change of expansion device (type, setting);
(b) Exchange of the lubricant;
(c) Exchange of gaskets.
Making it a retrofit refrigerant, a replacement refrigerant must have thermo-physical and chemical
properties similar to the reference refrigerant and shall result in a similar behavior in the refrigeration
circuit especially in terms of refrigerating capacities.
4.5.2 Test procedure
Due to the similar behavior of the retrofit and the reference refrigerants the number of tests necessary for
a type approval can be reduced. In terms of refrigerating capacity the retrofit refrigerants must comply
with a criterion of equivalence which allows an at maximum 10% lower refrigerating capacity for the
retrofit refrigerant when compared with the approved reference refrigerant.
Due
Due toto the
the similar
similar behavior
behavior of
of the
the retrofit
retrofit and
and the
the reference
reference refrigerants
refrigerants the
the number
number ofof tests
tests
necessary for a type approval can be reduced. In terms of refrigerating capacity the
necessary for a type approval can be reduced. In terms of refrigerating capacity the retrofit retrofit
refrigerants
refrigerants must
must comply
comply with
with aa criterion
criterion of
of equivalence
equivalence which
which allows
allows an
an at
at maximum
maximum 10%10% lower
lower
46 refrigerating capacity for the retrofit refrigerant when compared
refrigerating capacity for the retrofit refrigerant when compared with ATPwith the approved
theHandbook reference
approved2021
reference
refrigerant.
refrigerant.
The criterion
criterionofof
Thecriterion
The of equivalence
equivalence
equivalence is
is defined
defined
is defined by the
the formula:
byformula:
by the formula:
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 −𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 −𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ≥ −0,10
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄
(1)
(1)
≥ −0,10 (1)
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
where:
where:
where:
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 is the refrigerating
refrigeratingcapacity
capacity of the
unitunit tested
withwith the reference refrigerant,
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 is the refrigerating capacity of the unit tested with the reference refrigerant,

𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 is the of the tested the reference refrigerant,
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄
𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
is the
isthe refrigerating
therefrigerating
refrigerating capacity
capacity of
of the
unitunit
the unit tested
with with
tested with the
the retrofit
retrofit refrigerant.
refrigerant.
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 is capacity of the tested the retrofit refrigerant.
The
The
The number
number
number of
of tests
of tests andand
tests the the
and the evaluation
evaluation
evaluation of the
the retrofit
ofretrofit
of the retrofit refrigerants
is basedis
refrigerants
refrigerants based
ison
based on
on the
the differences
in test in
differences
the differences in
-- 50
50 --
results when compared with the reference refrigerant. At least a test at the lowest and at the highest
temperature of the respective temperature class in the mode of drive with the highest refrigerating
capacities has to be carried out.
In the case of a range of refrigeration units the test program may be further reduced according to
paragraph 4.5.3.
Dependent on the results of these tests further measurements may be necessary. Distinctions are made
for the following cases:
(i) Strict equivalence: is the case when the difference between the refrigerating capacities of the
retrofit refrigerant is lower than or equal to 10% less at all tested temperatures of the respective
temperature class when compared to the reference refrigerant. In the case of higher or up
to 5% lower refrigerating capacities, the refrigerating capacities of the reference refrigerant
can be kept in the test report of the retrofit refrigerant. In the case of more than 5% lower
refrigerating capacities, the refrigerating capacities of the retrofit refrigerant may be calculated
based on the test results.
(ii) Restricted equivalence: is the case when at least at one tested temperature of the respective
temperature class the difference between the refrigerating capacities of the retrofit refrigerant is
less than or equal to 10% lower when compared to the reference refrigerant. In this case a further
measurement at an intermediate temperature as specified by the manufacturer is necessary in
order to confirm the tendency of the deviation and to calculate the refrigerating capacities of the
retrofit refrigerant based on the test results.
If the power consumption tested with the retrofit refrigerant deviates from the results obtained with the
reference refrigerant, the data of power consumption shall be adjusted according to the measured values
by means of calculation, as well in case of strict as in case of restricted equivalence.
4.5.3 Test procedure for a range of refrigeration units
A range of refrigeration units describes a model range of a specific type of refrigeration units of different
sizes and different refrigerating capacities but with the same setup of refrigeration circuit and same type
of components of the refrigeration circuit.
In case of a range of refrigeration units a further reduction of tests is possible.
If at least two refrigeration units of the range including the units with the smallest and the highest
refrigerating capacities tested with the retrofit refrigerant have been proven by the test procedure
described in 4.5.2 to be equivalent to the results of the approved reference refrigerant, test reports for
all other units of this range of refrigeration units may be established by calculating the refrigerating
capacities based on the test reports of the refrigerating units operating with the reference refrigerant
and based on this limited number of tests with the retrofit refrigerant.
The conformity of the tested refrigeration units and each other regarded refrigeration unit with the
range of refrigeration units has to be confirmed by the manufacturer. In addition, the competent
authority shall take adequate measures to verify that each regarded unit is in conformity to this
range of refrigeration units.
4.5.4 Test report
An addendum containing both, the test results of the retrofit refrigerant and the approved reference
refrigerant, shall be added to the test report of the refrigeration unit operated by a retrofit refrigerant.
All modifications of the refrigerating unit according to 4.5.1 have to be documented in this addendum.
In case the refrigerating capacities and maybe also the power consumption of the refrigeration unit
containing the retrofit refrigerant have been established by calculation, the procedure of calculation has
to be described in this addendum too.
5. CHECKING THE INSULATING CAPACITY OF EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE

For the purpose of checking the insulating capacity of each piece of equipment in service as prescribed
in appendix 1, paragraphs 1 (b) and 1 (c), to this annex, the competent authorities may:
Apply the methods described in paragraphs 2.1.1 to 2.3.2 of this appendix; or
Appoint experts to assess the fitness of the equipment for retention in one or other of the categories
of insulated equipment. These experts shall take the following particulars into account and shall
base their conclusions on information as indicated below.
5.1 General examination of the equipment

This examination shall take the form of an inspection of the equipment to determine the following:
(a) the durable manufacturer’s plate affixed by the manufacturer;
(b) the general design of the insulating sheathing;
(c) the method of application of insulation;
(d) the nature and condition of the walls;
(e) the condition of the insulated compartment;
(f) the thickness of the walls;
and to make all appropriate observations concerning the effective insulating capacity of the equipment.
For this purpose the experts may cause parts of the equipment to be dismantled and require all
documents they may need to consult (plans, test reports, specifications, invoices, etc.) to be placed at
their disposal.
Comment to paragraph 5.1:

Changes in the K-coefficient during the service life of insulated bodies depend on the following factors:
(a) Nature of the insulating material;
(b) Nature of the covering layers (glass-fibre reinforced plastics or metal);
(c) Construction of the body;
(d) Number of doors and hatches permitted in the approval tests;
(e) Conditions of use (carriage of fresh produce or frozen or quick (deep) - frozen products).
5.2 Examination for air-tightness (not applicable to tank equipment)

The inspection shall be made by an observer stationed inside the equipment, which shall be placed in a
brightly-illuminated area. Any method yielding more accurate results may be used.
5.3 Decisions
(a) If the conclusions regarding the general condition of the body are favourable, the equipment may be
kept in service as insulated equipment of its initial class for a further period of not more than three years.
If the conclusions of the expert or experts are not acceptable, the equipment may be kept in service
only following a satisfactory measurement of the K coefficient according to the procedure described in
paragraphs 2.1.1 to 2.3.2 of this appendix; it may then be kept in service for a further period of six years.
(b) In the case of heavily insulated equipment, if the conclusions of an expert or experts show the body to
be unsuitable for keeping in service in its initial class but suitable for continuing in service as normally
insulated equipment, then the body may be kept in service in an appropriate class for a further three
years. In this case, the distinguishing marks (as in appendix 4 of this annex) shall be changed appropriately.
(c) If the equipment consists of units of serially-produced equipment of a particular type satisfying the
requirements of appendix l, paragraph 6, to this annex and belonging to one owner, then in addition
to an inspection of each unit of equipment, the K coefficient of not less than 1% of the number of units
involved, may be measured in conformity with the provisions of sections 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 of this appendix.
If the results of the examinations and measurements are acceptable, all the equipment in question may
be kept in service as insulating equipment of its initial class for a further period of six years.
Comment to paragraph 5.3:

Some countries consider 0.40 to be the maximum K-value for classes B, C, E and F also by re-approval,
and others are of the opinion that re-approval is done by fulfilling paragraphs 5 and 6.
Re-approval can be carried out either by a test station ensuring the maximum K-value for classes B,
C, E and F is less than 0.40 W/m2.°C and 0.70 W/m2.°C for classes A and D or by fulfilling paragraphs 5
and 6.
6. VERIFYING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THERMAL APPLIANCES OF

EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE
To verify as prescribed in appendix 1, paragraphs 1 (b) and (c), to this annex the effectiveness of the thermal
appliance of each item of refrigerated, mechanically refrigerated, heated or mechanically refrigerated and
heated equipment in service, the competent authorities may:
Apply the methods described in sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 of this appendix; or
Appoint experts to apply the particulars described in sections 5.1 and 5.2 of this appendix, when
applicable, as well as the following provisions.
6.1 6.1 Refrigerated

Refrigerated equipment
equipment other
other thanequipment
than equipment with fixed
with eutectic
fixed accumulators
eutectic
accumulators
It shall be verified that the inside temperature of the empty equipment, previously brought to the
outsidethat
It shall be verified temperature, can be brought
the inside temperature to the
of the limitequipment,
empty temperaturepreviously
of the class to which
brought theoutside
to the equipment
belongs, as prescribed in this annex, and maintained below the said limit temperature for a period
temperature, can be brought to the limit temperature of the class to which the equipment belongs, as
t
prescribed in this annex, and maintained below the said limit temperature for a period t
12∆T
such that t ≥
suchthat in which ‘
in which
∆T '
ΔT is the difference between + 30 °C and the said limit temperature, and
ΔT is the difference between + 30 °C and the said limit temperature, and
ΔTΔT'‘ is the difference between the mean outside temperature during the test and the
is the difference between the mean outside temperature during the test and the class
class limit
limit temperature,
temperature, thethe outside
outside temperature
temperature being
being not lower
not lower thanthan
+ 15+°C.
15 °C.
If the results are acceptable, the equipment may be kept in service as refrigerated equipment of
its initial class for a further period of not more than three years.
If the results are acceptable, the equipment may be kept in service as refrigerated equipment of its initial
class for a further period of not more than three years.
6.2 Mechanically refrigerated equipment
6.2.1 Independent equipment
(i) Equipment constructed from 2 January 2012
It shall be verified that, when the outside temperature is not lower than + 15 °C, the inside temperature
of the empty equipment can be brought to the class temperature within a maximum period (in minutes),
as prescribed in the table below:
Outside
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 °C
temperature
Class C, F 360 350 340 330 320 310 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 220 210 min
Class B, E 270 262 253 245 236 228 219 211 202 194 185 177 168 160 151 143 min
Class A, D 180 173 166 159 152 145 138 131 124 117 110 103 96 89 82 75 min
The inside temperature of the empty equipment must have been previously brought to the outside
temperature.
If the results are acceptable, the equipment may be kept in service as mechanically refrigerated equipment
of its initial class for a further period of not more than three years.
(ii) Transitional provisions applicable to equipment in service
For equipment constructed prior to the date given in 6.2 (i), the following provisions shall apply:
It shall be verified that, when the outside temperature is not lower than +15 °C, the inside temperature of
the empty equipment, which has been previously brought to the outside temperature, can be brought
within a maximum period of six hours:
In the case of equipment in classes A, B or C, to the minimum temperature, as prescribed in this

annex;
In the case of equipment in classes D, E or F, to the limit temperature, as prescribed in this annex.
If the results are acceptable, the equipment may be kept in service as mechanically refrigerated equipment
of its initial class for a further period of not more than three years.
Comment to paragraph 6.2 (ii):

Failure to pass the efficiency test is in many cases due to lack of maintenance. To prevent unnecessary
burden and additional costs for the owner-operator due to retests, it is strongly recommended that the
thermal appliance be maintained properly and checked for correct functioning prior to the efficiency
test. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/220, para. 44)
(iii) Multi-compartment equipment
The test prescribed in (i) shall be conducted simultaneously for all compartments. During the tests, if
the dividing walls are movable, they shall be positioned such that the volumes of the compartments
correspond with the maximum refrigeration demand.
Measurements shall be taken until the warmest temperature measured by one of the two sensors located
inside each compartment matches the class temperature.
For multi-compartment equipment whose compartment temperatures may be modified, a

supplementary reversibility test shall then be conducted:
The temperatures of the compartments shall be selected in such a way that adjacent compartments
are, to the extent possible, at different temperatures during the test. Certain compartments shall
be brought to the class temperature (-20 °C) while others shall be at 0 °C. Once such temperatures
are reached, the temperature settings shall be reversed for each compartment, thus bringing the
compartments that were at 0 °C to -20 °C and those that were at -20 °C to 0 °C.
It is verified that compartments at 0 °C have a correct temperature regulation at 0 °C ± 3 °C for at

least 10 minutes when the other compartments are at -20 °C. Subsequently, the settings for each of
the compartments shall be reversed and the same verifications shall be conducted.
In the case of equipment fitted with a heating function, the tests shall begin after the efficiency
test when the temperature is -20 °C. Without opening doors, the compartments whose settings
had been set at 0 °C shall be warmed, while the other compartments are kept at a temperature of
-20 °C. When the control criterion is met, the compartments’ settings shall be reversed. There shall
be no time limit to carry out these tests.
In the case of equipment without a heating function, it shall be permitted to open the doors of the
compartments to expedite the temperature rise of the compartments in question.
The equipment shall be considered compliant if:
(a) For each compartment, the class temperature has been reached within the time limit shown in the
table in (i). To define this time limit, the lowest (coldest) mean outside temperature shall be selected
from the two sets of measurements taken with the two outside sensors; and
(b) The additional tests mentioned in (iii), when required, are satisfactory.
6.2.2 Non-independent equipment
(i) Non-independent equipment, the refrigeration unit of which is powered by the engine of the
vehicle
It shall be verified that, when the outside temperature is not lower than 15° C, the inside temperature of
the empty equipment can be maintained at the class temperature, after cool-down and stabilization,
when the engine is running at the idle speed set by the manufacturer (where applicable), for a minimum
period of one hour and thirty minutes.
If the results are satisfactory, the equipment may be kept in service as mechanically refrigerated equipment
in its initial class for a further period of not more than three years.
(ii) Transitional provisions for non-independent equipment in service:
For equipment constructed prior to 6 January 2018, this provision need not be applied. In this case the
equipment shall comply with the requirements of (i) or (ii) of this paragraph as applicable for the date of
construction.
6.2.3 At the request of the manufacturer, replacement of the original refrigerant fluid of a mechanically
refrigerated equipment in service is allowed for the refrigerants described in the table below on the
following conditions:
Original refrigerant Drop-in refrigerant

R404A R452A
(a) a test report or addendum confirming equivalence to a similar mechanically refrigerated unit with
the drop-in refrigerant fluid is available; and
(b) an efficiency test according to 6.2.1 has been successfully carried out.
The manufacturer plate shall be modified or replaced to indicate the replacement refrigerating fluid and
the required charge.
The original test report number shall be retained on the ATP certificate of compliance supplemented by
a reference to the test report or addendum on which the replacement is based.
6.3 Heated equipment

It shall be verified that the difference between the inside temperature of the equipment and the outside
temperature which governs the class to which the equipment belongs as prescribed in this annex (a
difference of 22 °C in the case of class A, 32 °C in the case of class B, 42 °C in the case of class C and 52 °C
in the case of class D) can be achieved and be maintained for not less than 12 hours. If the results are
acceptable, the equipment may be kept in service as heated equipment of its initial class for a further
period of not more than three years.
6.4 Mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment

The check is carried out in two stages.
(i) During the first stage, it shall be verified that, when the outside temperature is not lower than +
15 °C, the inside temperature of the empty equipment can be brought to the class temperature
within a maximum period (in minutes), as prescribed in the table in paragraph 6.2 of this appendix.
The inside temperature of the empty equipment shall have been previously brought to the outside
temperature.
(ii) In the second stage, it shall be verified that the difference between the inside temperature of
the equipment and the outside temperature which governs the class to which the equipment
belongs as prescribed in this annex (a difference of 22 °C in the case of classes A, E and I, of 32 °C
in the case of classes B, F and J, of 42 °C in the case of classes C, G and K, and of 52 °C in the case
of classes D, H, and L), can be achieved and maintained for not less than 12 hours.
If the results are acceptable, the equipment may be kept in service as mechanically refrigerated and
heated equipment of its initial class for a further period of not more than three years.
Comment toComment
paragraphto
6.4paragraph
- Figure showing
6.4 - the positioning
Figure showing of the
the instruments
positioning of the instruments
FRC
FRC
aa aa
bb b
b
a= m
ax. 50 cm from front wall
a = and
max. 50cm
rear door.from front wall
and rear door.
b=min. 15 cm and max. 20 cm
b =above
min. 15cm and max. 20cm
the floor
above the floor
6.5 Temperature measuring points
Temperature measuring points protected against radiation shall be placed inside the body and
outside the body.
For measuring the inside temperature of the body (Ti), at least 2 temperature measuring points
shall be placed inside the body at a maximum distance of 50 cm from the front wall, 50 cm from
the rear door at a height of a minimum of 15 cm and a maximum of 20 cm above the floor area.
6.5 Temperature measuring points

Temperature measuring points protected against radiation shall be placed inside the body and outside
the body.
For measuring the inside temperature of the body (Ti), at least 2 temperature measuring points shall be
placed inside the body at a maximum distance of 50 cm from the front wall, 50 cm from the rear door at
a height of a minimum of 15 cm and a maximum of 20 cm above the floor area.
For measuring the outside temperature of the body (Te), at least 2 temperature measuring points shall
be placed:
(i) One measuring point vertically within 20 cm around the middle height of the body, at a distance of
10 to 20 cm from the side wall, and
(ii) Another measuring point 20 to 50 cm from the air inlet of the condenser unit.
The final reading shall be from the warmest measuring point inside the body at the end of the cool down
test. The outside temperature used to determine the maximum cool down time, in case of equipment
manufactured from 2 January 2012, is the average temperature of all readings from the outside measuring
points until the class temperature has been reached.
6.6 Provisions common to refrigerated, mechanically refrigerated and heated

equipment
(i) If the results are not acceptable, refrigerated, mechanically refrigerated, heated, or mechanically
refrigerated and heated equipment may be kept in service in its initial class only if it passes at a
testing station the tests described in sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 of this appendix; it may then be
kept in service in its initial class for a further period of six years.
(ii) If the equipment consists of units of serially-produced refrigerated, mechanically refrigerated,

heated, or mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment of a particular type satisfying the
requirements of appendix l, paragraph 6, to this annex and belonging to one owner, then in
addition to an inspection of the thermal appliances to ensure that their general condition
appears to be satisfactory, the effectiveness of the cooling or heating appliances of not less
than 1% of the number of units may be determined at a testing station in conformity with the
provisions of sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 of this appendix. If the results of the examinations
and of the determination of effectiveness are acceptable, all the equipment in question may
be kept in service in its initial class for a further period of six years.
7. PROCEDURE FOR MEASURING THE CAPACITY OF MECHANICAL

MULTI-TEMPERATURE REFRIGERATION UNITS AND DIMENSIONING
MULTI-COMPARTMENT EQUIPMENT
7.1 Definitions
(a) Multi-compartment equipment: Equipment with two or more insulated compartments for
maintaining a different temperature in each compartment;
(b) Multi-temperature mechanical refrigeration unit: Mechanical refrigeration unit with compressor
and common suction inlet, condenser and two or more evaporators set at different temperatures
in the various compartments of multi-compartment equipment;
(c) Host unit: Refrigeration unit with or without an integral evaporator;
(d) Unconditioned compartment: a compartment considered to have no evaporator or for which the
evaporator is inactive for the purposes of dimensioning calculations and certification;
(e) Multi-temperature operation: Operation of a multi-temperature mechanical refrigeration unit with

two or more evaporators operating at different temperatures in multi-compartment equipment;
(f) Nominal refrigerating capacity: Maximum refrigerating capacity of the refrigeration unit in mono-
temperature operation with two or three evaporators operating simultaneously at the same temperature;
(g) Individual refrigerating capacity (Pind-evap ): The maximum refrigerating capacity of each evaporator
in solo operation with the host unit;
(h) Effective refrigerating capacity (Peff-frozen-evap ): The refrigerating capacity available to the lowest
temperature evaporator when two or more evaporators are each operating in multi-temperature
mode, as prescribed in paragraph 7.3.5.
7.2 Test procedure for multi-temperature mechanical refrigeration units
7.2.1 General procedure
The test procedure shall be as defined in section 4 of this appendix.
The host unit shall be tested in combination with different evaporators. Each evaporator shall be tested
on a separate calorimeter, if applicable.
The nominal refrigerating capacity of the host unit in mono-temperature operation, as prescribed in
paragraph 7.2.2, shall be measured with a single combination of two or three evaporators including the
smallest and largest.
The individual refrigerating capacity shall be measured for all evaporators, each in mono-temperature
operation with the host unit, as prescribed in paragraph 7.2.3.
This test shall be conducted with two or three evaporators including the smallest, the largest and, if
necessary, a mid-sized evaporator.
If the multi-temperature unit can be operated with more than two evaporators:
– The host unit shall be tested with a combination of three evaporators: the smallest, the largest and a
mid-sized evaporator.
– In addition, on demand of the manufacturer, the host unit can be tested optionally with a combination
of two evaporators: the largest and smallest.
The tests are done in independent mode and stand by.
7.2.2 Determination of the nominal refrigerating capacity of the host unit
The nominal refrigerating capacity of the host unit in mono-temperature operation shall be measured
with a single combination of two or three evaporators operating simultaneously at the same temperature.
This test shall be conducted at -20 °C and at 0 °C.
The air inlet temperature of the host unit shall be +30 °C.
The nominal refrigerating capacity at -10 °C shall be calculated by linear interpolation from the capacities
at -20 °C and 0 °C.
7.2.3 Determination of the individual refrigerating capacity of each evaporator
The individual refrigerating capacity of each evaporator shall be measured in solo operation with the
host unit. The test shall be conducted at -20 °C and 0 °C. The air inlet temperature of the refrigeration unit
shall be +30 °C.
The individual refrigerating capacity at -10 °C shall be calculated by linear interpolation from the capacities
at 0 °C and -20 °C.
7.2.4 Test of the remaining effective refrigerating capacities of a set of evaporators in multi-
temperature operation at a reference heat load
The remaining effective refrigerating capacity shall be measured for each tested evaporator at
-20 °C with the other evaporator(s) operating under control of a thermostat set at 0 °C with a reference
heat load of 20% of the individual refrigerating capacity at -20 °C of the evaporator in question. The air
inlet temperature of the host unit shall be +30 °C.
For multi-temperature refrigeration units with more than one compressor such as cascade systems or
units with two-stage compression systems, where the refrigerating capacities can be simultaneously
maintained in the frozen and chilled compartments, the measurement of the effective refrigerating
capacity, shall be done at one additional heat load.
7.3 Dimensioning and certification of refrigerated multi-temperature equipment
The refrigerating capacity demand of multi-temperature equipment shall be based on the refrigerating
capacity demand of mono-temperature equipment as defined in this appendix.
For multi-compartment equipment, a K coefficient less than or equal to 0.40 W/m².°C for the outer body
as a whole shall be approved in accordance with subsections 2 to 2.2 of this appendix.
The insulation capacities of the outer body walls shall be calculated using the K coefficient of the body
approved in accordance with this Agreement. The insulation capacities of the internal dividing walls shall
be calculated using the K coefficients in the table in paragraph 7.3.7.
For issuance of an ATP certificate:
– The nominal refrigerating capacity of the multi-temperature refrigeration unit shall be at least equal
to the heat loss through the outer body walls of the equipment as a whole multiplied by the factor
1.75 as specified in paragraph 3.2.6 of this appendix.
– In each compartment, the calculated remaining effective refrigerating capacity at the lowest
temperature of each evaporator in multi-temperature operation shall be greater than or equal to
the maximum refrigeration demand of the compartment in the most unfavourable conditions, as
prescribed in paragraphs 7.3.5 and 7.3.6, multiplied by the factor 1.75 as specified in paragraph 3.2.6
of this appendix.
7.3.2 Conformity of the entire body
The outer body shall have a K value K ≤ 0.40 W/m2.°C.
The internal surface of the body shall not vary by more than 20%.
The equipment shall conform to:
Pnominal > 1.75 * Kbody * Sbody * ΔT
Where:
Pnominal is the nominal refrigerating capacity of the multi-temperature refrigeration unit,
Kbody is the K value of the outer body,
Sbody is the geometric mean surface area of the full body,
ΔT is the difference in temperature between outside and inside the body.

7.3.3 Determination of the refrigerating demand of chilled evaporators
With the bulkheads in given positions, the refrigerating capacity demand of each chilled evaporator is
calculated as follows:
Pchilled demand = (Schilled-comp – ΣSbulk) * Kbody* ΔText + Σ (Sbulk * Kbulk* ΔTint)
Where:
Kbody is the K value given by an ATP test report for the outer body,
Schilled-comp is the surface of the chilled compartment for the given positions of the bulkheads,
Sbulk are the surfaces of the bulkheads,
Kbulk are the K values of the bulkheads given by the table in paragraph 7.3.7,
ΔText is the difference in temperatures between the chilled compartment and +30 °C outside the
body,
ΔTint is the difference in temperatures between the chilled compartment and other compartments.
For unconditioned compartments a temperature of +20 °C shall be used for calculations.
7.3.4 Determination of the refrigerating demand of frozen compartments
With the bulkheads in given positions, the refrigerating capacity demand of each frozen compartment is
calculated as follows:
Pfrozen demand = (Sfrozen-comp – ΣSbulk) * Kbody* ΔText + Σ (Sbulk * Kbulk* ΔTint)
Where:
Kbody is the K value given by an ATP test report for the outer body,
Sfrozen-comp is the surface of the frozen compartment for the given positions of the bulkheads,
Sbulk are the surfaces of the bulkheads,
Kbulk are the K values of the bulkheads given by the table in paragraph 7.3.7,
ΔText is the difference in temperatures between the frozen compartment and +30 °C outside the
body,
ΔTint is the difference in temperatures between the frozen compartment and other compartments.
For insulated compartments a temperature of +20 °C shall be used for calculations.
7.3.5 Determination of the effective refrigerating capacity of frozen evaporators
The effective refrigerating capacity, in given positions of the bulkheads, is calculated as follows:
Peff-frozen-evap = Pind-frozen-evap * [1 - Σ (Peff-chilled-evap / Pind-chilled-evap)]
Where:
Peff-frozen-evap is the effective refrigerating capacity of the frozen evaporator with a given configuration,
Pind-frozen-evap is the individual refrigeration capacity of the frozen evaporator at -20 °C,
Peff-chilled-evap is the effective refrigeration capacity of each chilled evaporator in the given configuration
as defined in paragraph 7.3.6,
Pind-chilled-evap is the individual refrigerating capacity at -20 °C for each chilled evaporator.
This calculation method is only approved for multi-temperature mechanical refrigeration units with a single
one-stage compressor. For multi-temperature refrigeration units with more than one compressor such as
cascade systems or units with two-stage compression systems, where the refrigerating capacities can be
simultaneously maintained in the frozen and the chilled compartments, this calculation method shall not be
used, because it will lead to an underestimation of the effective refrigerating capacities. For this equipment,
the effective refrigerating capacities shall be interpolated between the effective refrigerating capacities
measured with two different heat loads given in the tests reports as prescribed in 7.2.4.
7.3.6 Conformity declaration
The equipment is declared in conformity in multi-temperature operation if, for each position of the
bulkheads, and each distribution of temperature in the compartments:
Peff-frozen-evap ≥ 1.75 * Pfrozen demand
Peff-chilled-evap ≥ 1.75 * Pchilled demand
Where:
Peff-frozen-evap is the effective refrigeration capacity of the considered frozen evaporator at the class
temperature of the compartment in the given configuration,
Peff-chilled-evap is the effective refrigeration capacity of the considered chilled evaporator at the class
temperature of the compartment in the given configuration,
Pfrozen demand is the refrigerating demand of the considered compartment at the class temperature of
the compartment in the given configuration as calculated according to 7.3.4,
Pchilled demand is the refrigerating demand of the considered compartment at the class temperature of
the compartment in the given configuration as calculated according to 7.3.3.
It shall be considered that all the positions of the bulkheads have been dimensioned if the wall positions
from the smallest to the largest compartment sizes are checked by iterative methods whereby no input
step change in surface area is greater than 20%.
A declaration of conformity shall be provided in a supplementary document to the certificate of

compliance issued by the competent authority of the country of manufacture. The document shall be
based on information given by the manufacturer. The declaration shall conform to the layout given in
Model No. 14 of this appendix.
This document shall include at least:
(a) A sketch showing the actual compartment configuration and evaporator arrangement;
(b) Proof by calculation that the multi-compartment equipment meets the requirements of ATP for the
user’s intended degree of freedom with regards to compartment temperatures and compartment
dimensions.

Calculations in conformity with item 7.3.6 can be carried out using a calculation tool approved by the
competent authority.
7.3.7 Internal dividing walls
Thermal losses through internal dividing walls shall be calculated using the K coefficients in the following
table.
Minimum foam
K coefficient – [W/m².°C]
thickness
Fixed Removable [mm]
Longitudinal – alu floor 2.0 3.0 25
Longitudinal – GRP floor 1.5 2.0 25
Transversal – alu floor 2.0 3.2 40
Transversal – GRP floor 1.5 2.6 40
K coefficients of movable dividing walls include a safety margin for specific ageing and unavoidable
thermal leakages.
For specific designs with additional heat transfer caused by additional thermal bridges compared to a
standard design, the partition K coefficient shall be increased.
7.3.8 The requirements of section 7 shall not apply to equipment produced before the entry into force of
the requirements and having undergone equivalent tests as multi-temperature equipment. Equipment
produced before the entry into force of this section may be operated in international transport but may
only be transferred from one country to another with the agreement of the competent authorities of the
countries concerned.
8. TEST REPORTS
A test report of the type appropriate to the equipment tested shall be drawn up for each test in conformity
with one or other of the models 1 to 14 hereunder.
MODEL No. 1 A
Test Report
Prepared in conformity with the provisions of the Agreement on the International Carriage of
Perishable Foodstuffs and on the Special Equipment to be Used for such Carriage (ATP)
Test report No..............................................................................
Section 1
Specifications of the equipment (equipment other than tanks for the carriage of liquid foodstuffs)
Approved testing station/expert: 1
Name ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Address ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type of equipment: 2
Make ................................................................ Registration number ................................ Serial number .......................................
Date of first entry into service ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Tare3 .......................................................................................... kg Carrying capacity 3 ........................................................................... kg
Body:
Make and type .......................................................................... Identification number ..........................................................................
Built by ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Owned or operated by .........................................................................................................................................................................................
Submitted by ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of construction (month/year) ...............................................................................................................................................................
Principal dimensions:
Outside: length ......................................... m, width ............................................... m, height ............................................... m
Inside: length ............................................. m, width ............................................... m, height ............................................... m
Total floor area of body ................................................................................................................................................................................. m2
Usable internal volume of body .............................................................................................................................................................. m3

MODEL No. 1 A (cont’d)

MODEL No. 1 A (cont'd)
Method used
1, 3
.................................................................. Figures used 1, 3 ................................................................................................
Method used 1, 3
......................................... Figures used 1, 3………..………………………...
Total inside surface area Si of body ........................................................................................................................................................ m2
Total inside surface area Si of body .......................................................................................... m 2
Total outside
Total outsidesurface
surface area
area SSee of
of body
body........................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
m2 m2
Mean
Mean surfacearea:
surface S = Si . Se ............................................................................................... m2
area: ............................................................................................................................................................... m2
Specifications
Specifications of the
of the body
body walls:4
walls:
4
Top ..................................................................................................................................................
Top .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bottom .............................................................................................................................................
Bottom ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sides ................................................................................................................................................
Sides ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structural peculiarities of body: 5
Structural Number, ) of doors

peculiarities of body: 5 ..........................................................................................................
positions ) of vents ...........................................................................................................

Number, ) of doors ..................................................................................................................................................................
and dimensions ) of ice-loading apertures ...................................................................................
positions ) of vents ..................................................................................................................................................................
Accessories 6 ..............................................................................................................................................
............................... ………………………………………………………………………………..
and dimensions ) of ice-loading apertures ..............................................................................................................................
K coefficient = …........................................................................................................................ W/m2.°C
Accessories 6 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
K coefficient = .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... W/m2.°C
1
Delete as necessary (experts only in the case of tests carried out under ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sections 5 or 6).
2
Wagon, lorry, trailer, semitrailer, container, etc.
3
State source of information.
4
Nature
1 andDelete
thickness
as ofnecessary
materials constituting thein
(experts only body
thewalls,
casefrom
of the
testsinterior to the
carried outexterior,
undermode
ATP ofAnnex
construction,
1, etc.
5
If there areAppendix
surface irregularities,
2, sections show how Si and Se were determined.
5 or 6).
6
Meat2 bars,Wagon, lorry,etc.
flettner fans, trailer, semi-trailer, container, etc.
3
4
Nature and thickness of materials constituting the body walls, from the interior to the exterior,
mode of construction, etc.
5
If there are surface irregularities, show how Si and Se were determined.
6
Meat bars, flettner fans, etc.
- 68 -
MODEL No. 1 B
Test Report
Prepared in conformity with the provisions of the Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable
Foodstuffs and on the Special Equipment to be Used for such Carriage (ATP)
Test report No ....................................................................
Section 1
Specifications of tanks for the carriage of liquid foodstuffs
Approved testing station/expert: 1
Name .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Address .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type of tank: 2
Make ............................................................................ Registration number .............................. Serial number .................................
Date of first entry into service ............................................................................................................................................................................
Tare 3 ................................................................................................. kg Carrying capacity 3 ..................................................................... kg
Tank:
Make and type ................................................................................... Identification number ...................................................................
Built by ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Owned or operated by ..........................................................................................................................................................................................
Submitted by ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of construction (month/year) ................................................................................................................................................................
Principal dimensions:
Outside: length of cylinder ........................ m, major axis ...................................... m, minor axis ....................................... m
Inside: length of cylinder ............................. m, major axis ...................................... m, minor axis ....................................... m
Usable internal volume ................................................................................................................................................................................... m3

MODEL No. 1 B (cont’d)
MODEL No.
Internal 1 B (cont'd)
volume of each compartment ................................................................................................................................................ m3
Internal volume of each compartment ………………………………………………………… m3
Total inside surface area Si of tank ........................................................................................................................................................... m2
Total inside surface area Si of tank ………………………………………………………..….. m2
Inside surface area of each compartment Si1 ............................................................. , Si2 ............................................................. m2
Inside surface area of each compartment Si1 ………………., Si2 ……….………………….. m 2
Total outside
Total surface
outside surfacearea
area SSee of
of tank .......................................................................................................................................................
tank ………………………………………………………….. m2 m2
Mean surface
Mean surfacearea tank: S = Si . Se .................................................................................................................................................
areaofoftank: …………………………………………………….. m2 m2
Specifications
Specifications of the
of the tanktank walls:
walls: 4 .............................................................................................................
4
........................................................................................................................................................................................
Structural peculiarities of the tank: 5…………………………………………………………….……….
Structural peculiarities of the tank: 5 .................................................................................................................................................................................
Number, dimensions and description of manholes .........................................................................
Number, .........................................................................................................................................................
dimensions and description of manholes .............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description of manhole covers .......................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Description
Number, dimensions of manhole andcoversdescription .........................................................................................................................................................................
of discharge piping ..............................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Number and description of tank cradles ..........................................................................................

Number, .........................................................................................................................................................
dimensions and description of discharge piping .............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Accessories ................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Number and description of tank cradles .....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Accessories .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Delete as necessary (experts only in the case of tests carried out under ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sections 5 or 6).
2
Wagon, lorry, trailer, semi-trailer, container, etc.
3
4
Nature and thickness of materials constituting the tank walls, from the interior to the exterior, mode of construction, etc.
1
5
If there are Delete as necessaryshow
surface irregularities, (experts
how Sionly
and Sin
e
the determined.
were case of tests carried out under ATP Annex 1,
Appendix 2, sections 5 or 6).
2
Wagon, lorry, trailer, semi-trailer, container, etc.
3
4
Nature and thickness of materials constituting the tank walls, from the interior to the exterior,
mode of construction, etc.
5
If there are surface irregularities, show how Si and Se were determined.
- 70 -
MODEL No. 2 A
Section 2
Measurement in accordance with ATP, Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 2.1, of the overall
MODEL No. 2coefficient
A of heat transfer of equipment other than tanks for liquid foodstuffs
Section 2
Measurement in accordance with ATP, Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 2.1, of the overall
MODELTesting
No. 2 Amethod:coefficient
inside cooling/inside heating
of heat transfer
1
of equipment other than tanks for liquid foodstuffs
Section 2
Date and time of closure of equipment’s doors and other openings: ........................................................................................................
Measurement in method:
Testing accordance withcooling/inside
inside ATP, Annex heating 1, Appendix
1 2, sub-section 2.1, of the overall
coefficient
Averages of heatfor
obtained transfer of equipment
.............................. other
hours of than tanks foroperation
continuous liquid foodstuffs
(fromDate and time ofa.m./p.m.
.............................. closure of to
equipment's doors a.m./p.m.):
.............................. and other openings: ……………………………….….
Averages obtained
(a) Mean for ……………
outside hours
temperature ofofbody:
continuous operation
T = .............................. °C ± .............................. °C
Testing method: inside
(from cooling/inside
……………. heating
a.m./p.m.
1
to …… a.m./p.m.): e
Date and time of (b)
closure ofMean
equipment's
(a) Mean inside doors and other
temperature
outside temperature openings:
ofofbody:
body: TTe== ……………………………….….
..............................±°C……………………….……°C
…………..°C ± ................................. °C
i
Averages obtained for

(b)…………… hours
Mean inside of continuous
temperature operation
of body: Ti = …………….°C ± …………………...… °C
(from ……………. (c) a.m./p.m.
Mean temperature difference
to …… a.m./p.m.): achieved: ΔT = .............................................................. °C
(c) Mean temperature difference achieved: ΔT = ……………….…………………...°C
(a)Maximum
Mean outside temperature
temperature of body: Te = …………..°C ± ……………………….……°C
spread:
Maximum temperature spread:
(b) Mean inside temperature of body: Ti = …………….°C ± …………………...… °C
Outside body ................................................................................................................................................ °C
Outside body …………………………………………………………………………… °C
(c) Mean temperature difference achieved: ΔT = ……………….…………………...°C
Inside
Inside body....................................................................................................................................................
body ............ ……………………………………………………………………………..°C °C
Maximum temperature spread:
MeanMeantemperature of of
walls ofofbody +
T e T i ........................................................................................
Outside body body
……………………………………………………………………………
temperature walls ............................................................................................
°C °C °C
2
Inside body ............
Operating ……………………………………………………………………………..°C
temperature
temperatureofofheat
heatexchanger .............................................................................................. °C
2
Operating exchanger 2 .......................................................................................... °C
Mean temperature of walls

T +T
body eoutside i
Dew Dew point point
of of ofatmosphere
atmosphere outside ........................................................................................
body during
body duringcontinuous
continuous operation
operation 2 2 °C
……………………………………...………. 2 °C ± .............................................................................. °C
........................................................................................... °C ± ........................................................................................... °C
Operating temperature of heatofexchanger
Total duration
2
.......................................................................................... °C
test ............................................................................................................................... h
Total duration of test .................................................................................................................................................... h
Dew point of atmosphere
Duration of outside bodyoperation
continuous during continuous operation 2
............................................................................................................ h
……………………………………...………. °C ± .............................................................................. °C
Duration of continuous operation ...................................................................................................................... h
Power consumed in exchangers: W1 ..................................................................................................... W
Total duration of test ............................................................................................................................... h
Power consumed
Portion in exchangers:
of power absorbed byW the ................................................................................................................ W
1 fans entering the body: W2 ....................................................... W
Duration of continuous operation ............................................................................................................ h
Overall
Portion coefficient
ofexchangers:
power of heat transfer
absorbed by thecalculated
fans entering by the formula:
the body: W2 ............................................
Power consumed in W1 ..................................................................................................... W W
W1 − W 2
Inside-cooling test 1 K =
Portion Overall
of powercoefficient
absorbed by the fans
of heat entering
transfer S . ∆byTWthe
the body:
calculated 2 .......................................................
formula: W
Overall coefficient ofInside-heating

heat transfer calculated
test 1 by K W1 + W 2
the=formula:
W1 − W 2 S. ∆ T
Inside-cooling
Inside-cooling test test
1 K = 1
K =………………………. S . ∆ TW/m2.°C
W1 + W 2
Inside-heating
Inside-heating test test
1 1
K =
S. ∆ T
K =………………………. W/m2.°C
- 71 -
K = ........................................... W/m2.°C
- 71 -
Expanded uncertainty with test used 3 .............................................................................................................................................................. %

(coverage factor k = ................................................... for an accepted confidence level ................................................................... %)
Remarks: 4 ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(To be completed only if the equipment does not have thermal appliances:)
According to the above test results, the equipment may be recognized by means of a certificate in accordance
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3, valid for a period of not more than six years, with the distinguishing mark IN/IR.1
However, this report shall be valid as a certificate of type approval within the meaning of ATP Annex 1,
Appendix 1, paragraph 6 (a) only for a period of not more than six years, that is until
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Date of test report: ................................................................................................ .................................................................................................
Testing Officer
1
Delete as necessary.
2
For inside-cooling test only.
The present provisions concerning the use of expanded uncertainty instead of the maximum error are applicable to the tests carried
3
out after 1 January 2021

4
If the body is not parallelepipedic, specify the points at which the outside and inside temperatures were measured.
MODEL No. 2 B
Section 2
MODEL No. 2 B
Measurement, in accordance withSection
ATP Annex
2 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 2.2, of the overall
coefficient of heat transfer of tanks for liquid foodstuffs
Measurement, in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 2.2, of the overall
MODEL No. 2 B coefficient of heat transfer of tanks for liquid foodstuffs
Section 2
Testing method: inside heating
Testing method: inside
Measurement, heating with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 2.2, of the overall
in accordance
Date and time of closure coefficient
of equipment’s
of heatopenings
transfer of .............................................................................................................................................
tanks for liquid foodstuffs
Date and time of closure of equipment's openings ....................................................................................
Mean values
Mean values obtained
obtainedfor for......................................
………………..……………hours hours of continuous operation
of continuous operation
(from ......................................
Testing method: inside heating a.m./p.m. to ...................................... a.m./p.m.):
(from ………… a.m./p.m. to ……………. a.m./p.m.):
Date(a)
and time
Meanof outside
closure oftemperature
equipment's openings
of tank: T....................................................................................
= ............................................................. °C ± ............................................................ °C
(a) Mean outside temperature of tank: Te = …………………°C
e ± ………………………°C
Mean values obtained for ………………..……………hours of continuous operation
(b)(b) Mean
Meaninside
insidetemperature of tank:
temperature of tank:
(from ………… a.m./p.m. to ……………. a.m./p.m.):
Ti=
∑S in .Tin
(a) Mean outside temperature of tank: Te = …………………°C ± ………………………°C
∑
Sin = ................................ °C ± ............................... °C
(b) Mean inside temperature of tank: = ………….. °C± …………………°C
(c)(c) Mean
Mean temperature
temperaturedifference achieved:
difference ΔT …………………………………………….°C
achieved: ΔT ............................................................................................................................. °C
∑ S .T
Ti=
in in
∑ spread: Sinspread:
Maximum temperature
Maximum temperature
= ………….. °C± …………………°C
Inside tank .................................................................................................................................. °C
Insidetemperature
(c) Mean tank ....................................................................................................................................................................................................
difference achieved: ΔT …………………………………………….°C °C
Inside each compartment ........................................................................................................... °C
Maximum Inside
temperature
each spread:
compartment .................................................................................................................................................................. °C
Outside tank ............................................................................................................................... °C
Inside tank .................................................................................................................................. °C
Mean temperature
Outsideoftank tank................................................................................................................................................................................................
walls ........................................................................................................... °C °C
Inside each compartment ........................................................................................................... °C
Total duration of test ............................................................................................................................... h
Mean temperature of tank walls ................................................................................................................................................................................... °C
Outside tank ............................................................................................................................... °C
TotalMean
duration of testof...............................................................................................................................................................................................................h
temperature tank walls ........................................................................................................... °C
Total duration
Duration of of of test ...............................................................................................................................
continuous operation h
................................................................................................................................................................................ h
Portion power absorbed by the fans entering the body: W2 ....................................................... W
Overall
Power coefficient
consumed of heat transfer
in exchangers: W1calculated by the formula:
.......................................................................................................................................................................... W
W1 + W 2
K = absorbed
Portion of power by the fans entering the body: W2 ....................................................................................................... W
Portion of powerSabsorbed
.∆T by the fans entering the body: W2 ....................................................... W
Overall coefficient
Overall of of
coefficient
K = ………….heat
heattransfer
transfer
W/m2.°Ccalculated bythe
calculated by theformula:
formula:
W1 + W 2
K =
S. ∆ T
K = …………. W/m2.°C
K = ................................ W/m2.°C - 73 -
- 73 -
Expanded uncertainty with test used 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. %
(coverage factor k = ........................................................... for an accepted confidence level ........................................................... %)
Remarks: 2 ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(To be completed only if the equipment does not have thermal appliances:)
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3, valid for a period of not more than six years, with the distinguishing mark IN/IR. 3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
1
The present provisions concerning the use of expanded uncertainty instead of the maximum error are applicable to the tests carried
out after 1 January 2021
2
If the tank is not parallelepipedic, specify the points at which the outside and inside temperatures were measured.
3
MODEL No. 3
Section 2
Expert field check of the insulating capacity of equipment in service in accordance with
ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, section 5
The check was based on test report No ............................................................................. dated ...........................................................................

issued by approved testing station/expert (name and address) ...................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condition when checked:
Top ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Side walls ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
End wall ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Doors and openings ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Seals ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cleaning drainholes ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Air tightness .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
K coefficient of the equipment when new (as shown in the previous test report) ..........................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... W/m2.°C
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
According to the above test results the equipment may be recognized by means of a certificate in accordance
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3, valid for not more than three years, with the distinguishing mark IN/IR. 1
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
1
MODEL No. 4 A
Section 3
Determination of the efficiency of cooling appliances of refrigerated equipment usingice or dry ice by
an approved testing station in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 3.1,
except 3.1.3 (b) and 3.1.3 (c)
Cooling appliance:
Description of cooling appliance .................................................................................................................................................................
Nature of refrigerant ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal refrigerant filling capacity specified

by manufacturer ............................................................................................................................................................................................... kg
Actual filling of refrigerant used for test ............................................................................................................................................ kg
Drive independent/dependent/mains-operated 1 ............................................................................................................................
Cooling appliance removable/not removable 1 ..................................................................................................................................
Manufacturer ............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type, serial number ..............................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of manufacture (month/year) .............................................................................................................................................................
Filling device (description, where situated;

attach drawing if necessary) ............................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inside ventilation appliances:
Description (number of appliances, etc.) ...............................................................................................................................................
Power of electric fans ..................................................................................................................................................................................... W
Delivery rate .................................................................................................................................................................................................. m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: cross-section ................................................................. m2, length .......................................................... m
Air intake screen; description 1 .......................................................................................................................................................................
1
Delete if not applicable.
Automatic devices .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mean temperatures at beginning of test:
Inside ......................................................................................................... °C ± ........................................................................................................°C
Outside ..................................................................................................... °C ± ........................................................................................................°C
Dew point in test chamber .......................................................... °C ± ........................................................................................................°C
Power of internal heating system ................................................................................................................................................................................. W
Date and time of closure of equipment’s doors and other openings .........................................................................................................
Record of mean inside and outside temperatures of body and/or curve showing variation
of these temperatures with time ........................................................................................................................................................................................
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3, valid for a period of not more than six years, with the distinguishing mark
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
However, this report shall be valid as a certificate of type approval within the meaning of ATP
Annex 1, Appendix 1, paragraph 6 (a) only for a period of not more than six years, that is until
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 4 B
Section 3
Determination of the efficiency of cooling appliances of refrigerated equipment with eutectic plates
by an approved testing station in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 3.1,
except 3.1.3 (a) and 3.1.3 (c)
Cooling appliance:
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nature of eutectic solution ....................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal eutectic solution filling capacity specified

by manufacturer .................................................................................................................................................................................................... kg
Latent heat at freezing temperature stated by manufacturer ...................................... kJ/kg ......................................... at °C
Cooling appliance removable/not removable 1
Drive independent/dependent/mains-operated 1
Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type, serial number .....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of manufacture (month/year) ..................................................................................................................................................................
Eutectic plates: Make ............................................................................................ Type .......................................................................................
Dimensions and number of plates, where situated;

distance from walls (attach drawing) ..............................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Total cold reserve stated by manufacturer for freezing

temperature of ........................................................................................ kJ to ...................................................................................................°C
Inside ventilation appliances (if any):
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic devices .......................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Mechanical refrigerator (if any):
Make ................................................................ Type ...................................................................... No. ....................................................................
Where situated ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Compressor: Make ............................................................................................ Type .........................................................................................
Type of drive ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nature of refrigerant ...............................................................................................................................................................................................
Condenser .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refrigerating capacity stated by the manufacturer for the specified freezing temperature and an outside
temperature of + 30 °C ....................................................................................................................................................................................... W
Automatic devices:
Make .......................................................................................................... Type ..........................................................................................................
Defrosting (if any) .....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thermostat ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LP pressostat ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HP pressostat ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Relief valve ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Others ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Accessory devices:
Electrical heating devices of the door joint:
Capacity by linear metre of the resistor .......................................................................................................................................... W/m
Linear length of the resistor ......................................................................................................................................................................... m
Inside ......................................................................................................... °C ± ........................................................................................................°C
Outside ..................................................................................................... °C ± ........................................................................................................°C
Dew point in test chamber .......................................................... °C ± ........................................................................................................°C

Date and time of closure of equipment’s

doors and openings ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Period of accumulation of cold ....................................................................................................................................................................................... h
Record of mean inside and outside temperatures of body

and/or curve showing variation of these temperatures
with time ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 4 C
Section 3
Determination of the efficiency of cooling appliances of refrigerated equipment using liquefied gases by an
approved testing station in accordance with ATP Annex l, Appendix 2, sub-section 3.1,
except 3.1.3 (a) and 3.1.3 (b)
Cooling appliance:
Description ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drive independent/dependent/mains-operated 1
Cooling appliance removable/not removable 1
Manufacturer ............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type, serial number ..............................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of manufacture (month/year) ............................................................................................................................................................
Nature of refrigerant ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal refrigerant filling capacity specified

by manufacturer .............................................................................................................................................................................................. kg
Actual filling of refrigerant used for test ........................................................................................................................................... kg
Description of tank ...............................................................................................................................................................................................
Filling device (description, where situated) ..........................................................................................................................................
Description (number, etc.) ..............................................................................................................................................................................
Power of electric fans .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... W
Delivery rate ................................................................................................................................................................................................. m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: cross-section ................................................................ m2, length .......................................................... m
Automatic devices .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
MODEL No. 4 C (cont’d)
Inside ...................................................................................................... °C ± .....................................................................................................°C
Outside .................................................................................................. °C ± .....................................................................................................°C
Dew point in test chamber ...................................................... °C ± .....................................................................................................°C

doors and openings ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Record of mean inside and outside temperatures of body and/or curve showing
variation of these temperatures with time ...................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Appendix 1, paragraph 6 (a), only for a period of not more than six years, that is until
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 5
Section 3
Determination of the efficiency of cooling appliances of mechanically refrigerated equipment
by an approved testing station in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 3.2
Mechanical refrigerating appliances:
Drive independent/dependent/mains-operated 1 .................................................................................................................
Mechanical refrigerating appliances removable/not removable 1 ...............................................................................
Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type, serial number ....................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of manufacture (month/year) ..................................................................................................................................................
Refrigerant Charge:
Refrigerant fluid: (ISO/ASHRAE designation)a) ............................................................................................................................
Nominal mass of refrigerant .................................................................................................................................................................
Effective refrigerating capacity stated by manufacturer for an outside temperature of + 30 °C

and an inside temperature of:
0 °C ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................W
-10 °C .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. W
-20 °C ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................W
Compressor:
Make ................................................................................................... Type ....................................................................................................
Drive: electric/thermal/hydraulic/other 1
Description ......................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make ................................... Type ................................... power .................................. kW at .................................. rpm
Condenser and evaporator ....................................................................................................................................................................
Motor element of fan(s): make ....................................... type ....................................... number ......................................
power ....................................... kW at .............................................................................................. rpm
Description (number of appliances, etc.) ......................................................................................................................................
Power of electric fans .......................................................................................................................................................................... W
Delivery rate ....................................................................................................................................................................................... m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: crosssection ................................................. m2, length ................................................................. m
1
a)
If existing
MODEL No. 5 (cont’d)
Automatic devices:
Make ........................................................................................................... Type ............................................................................................................
Defrosting (if any) .........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thermostat .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LP pressostat ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HP pressostat ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Relief valve ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Others ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inside temperature .......................................................................................... °C ± ......................................................................................... °C
Outside temperature .................................................................................... °C ± .......................................................................................... °C
Dew point in test chamber ....................................................................... °C ± ......................................................................................... °C

doors and other openings ......................................................................................................................................................................................................
Record of mean inside and outside temperatures of body and/or curve showing variation
of these temperatures with time ......................................................................................................................................................................................
Time between beginning of test and attainment

of prescribed mean inside temperature of body ................................................................................................................................................. h
Remarks: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 6
Section 3
Determination of the efficiency of heating appliances of heated equipment by an approved testing

station in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 3.3
Heating appliance:
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drive independent/dependent/mains-operated 1 .................................................................................................................................
Heating appliance removable/not removable 1 .......................................................................................................................................
Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Where situated ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overall area of heat exchange surfaces .................................................................................................................................................. m2
Effective power rating as specified by manufacturer ................................................................................................................... kW
Description (number of appliances, etc.) ......................................................................................................................................................
Power of electric fans ........................................................................................................................................................................................... W
Delivery rate ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: cross-section ................................................................ m2, length ................................................................. m
Inside temperature ................................................................................... °C ± ............................................................................................... °C
Outside temperature ............................................................................... °C ± ............................................................................................... °C

doors and other openings ......................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Record of mean inside and outside temperatures of body and/or

curve showing variation of these temperatures with time ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Time between beginning of test and attainment of prescribed

mean inside temperature of body ...................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................h
Where applicable, mean heating output during test to maintain prescribed

temperature difference 2 between inside and outside of body .....................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. W
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
2
Increased by 35% for new equipment.
MODEL No. 7
Section 3
Determination of the efficiency of cooling and heating appliances of mechanically refrigerated and heated
equipment by an approved testing station in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, subsection 3.4
Drive independent/dependent/mains-operated1
Mechanical refrigerating appliances removable/not removable1
Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refrigerant Charge:
Refrigerant fluid: (ISO/ASHRAE designation) a) ...........................................................................................................................................
Nominal mass of refrigerant ..................................................................................................................................................................................
Effective refrigerating capacity stated by manufacturer for an outside temperature of + 30 °C and an inside
temperature of:
0 °C ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... W
-10 °C ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ W
-20 °C ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ W
Compressor:
Make ........................................................................................................... Type ............................................................................................................
Drive: electric/thermal/hydraulic/other1
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make ........................................... Type ........................................... power .......................................... kW at .......................................... rpm
Condenser and evaporator ...................................................................................................................................................................................
Motor element of fan(s): make ............................................. type ............................................. number ..............................................
power ................................................. kW at ................................................. rpm
a)
If existing
Heating appliance:
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drive independent/dependent/mains-operated1
Heating appliance removable/not removable1
Manufacturer .................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type, serial number ....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Where situated ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Effective power rating as specified by manufacturer .....................................................................................................................kW
Delivery rate .........................................................................................................................................................................................................m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: cross-section ........................................................ m2, length .......................................................................... m
Automatic devices:
Make ........................................................................................................... Type ............................................................................................................
Defrosting (if any) .........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thermostat .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LP pressostat ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HP pressostat ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Relief valve .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Others ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inside ................................................................................................... °C ± ............................................................................................................. °C
Outside ............................................................................................... °C ± ............................................................................................................. °C
Dew point in test chamber2 ................................................. °C ± ............................................................................................................. °C
Power of internal heating system ......................................................................................................................................................................................
Date and time of closure of equipment’s doors and openings ......................................................................................................................
Record of mean inside and outside temperatures of body and/or curve showing variation of these temperatures
with time ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Time between beginning of test and attainment of prescribed mean inside temperature of body
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. h
Where applicable, mean heating output during test to maintain prescribed temperature difference3 between
inside and outside of body 4 .............................................................................................................................................................................................W
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
1
2
Only for cooling appliances.
3
Increased by 35% for new equipment.
4
Only for heating appliances.
MODEL No. 8
Section 3
Expert field check of the efficiency of cooling appliances of refrigerated equipment in service
in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 6.1
The check was conducted on the basis of report No ...........................................................................................................................................

dated ....................................................................................................................................................................................................., issued by approved
testing station/expert (name, address) ...........................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cooling appliance:
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nature of refrigerant ...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nominal refrigerant filling capacity

specified by manufacturer .............................................................................................................................................................................. kg
Actual filling of refrigerant used for test ................................................................................................................................................. kg
Filling device (description, where situated) ...............................................................................................................................................
Inside ventilation appliances: ...............................................................................................................................................................................
Power of electric fans ............................................................................................................................................................................................W
Delivery rate .........................................................................................................................................................................................................m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: cross-section ................................................................ m2, length ................................................................ m
Condition of cooling appliance and ventilation appliances .............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inside temperature attained ........................................................................................................................................................................... °C
At an outside temperature of ......................................................................................................................................................................... °C

Inside temperature of the equipment before the refrigerating appliance is started ...................................................................°C
Total running time of the refrigerating unit ............................................................................................................................................................ h
Time between beginning of test and attainment of prescribed

mean inside temperature of body ................................................................................................................................................................................ h
Check on operation of thermostat ....................................................................................................................................................................................
For refrigerated equipment with eutectic plates:
Period of operation of the cooling appliance for freezing

of the eutectic solution ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ h
Period during which inside air temperature is maintained

after the appliance is switched off ............................................................................................................................................................................... h
Remarks: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3, valid for a period of not more than three years, with the distinguishing mark
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 9
Section 3
Expert field check of the efficiency of cooling appliances of mechanically refrigerated equipment in service in
accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 6.2
The check was conducted on the basis of report No .............................................................dated ................................................................

issued by approved testing station/expert (name, address) .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Effective refrigerating capacity specified by manufacturer for an outside temperature of +30 °C

and an inside temperature of
0 °C .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. W
-10 °C .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. W
-20 °C .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. W
Refrigerant Charge:
Refrigerant fluid: (ISO/ASHRAE designation) a) ............................................................................................................................................
Delivery rate ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: cross-section ......................................................................... m2, length ........................................................................ m
Condition of mechanical refrigerating appliance and inside ventilation appliances

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
a)
If existing
Inside temperature attained ........................................................................................................................................................................................... °C
and with a relative running time of ............................................................................................................................................................. %
Running time .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. h
Check on operation of thermostat ...................................................................................................................................................................
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3 valid for a period of not more than three years, with the distinguishing mark
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 10
Section 3
Expert field check of the efficiency of heating appliances of heated equipment in service in accordance
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, sub-section 6.3
The check was conducted on the basis of report No. ............................................................ dated ...............................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mode of heating: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manufacturer ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of manufacture (month/year) ...................................................................................................................................................................
Where situated ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Effective power rating as specified by manufacturer .................................................................................................................... kW
Description (number of appliances, etc.) .....................................................................................................................................................
Delivery rate ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: cross-section ........................................................................ m2, length .......................................................................... m
Condition of heating appliance and inside ventilation appliances ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Running time .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. h
Check on operation of thermostat ..................................................................................................................................................................................
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3 valid for a period of not more than three years, with the distinguishing mark
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 11
Section 3
Expert field check of the efficiency of cooling and heating appliances of mechanically refrigerated and heated
equipment in service in accordance with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2, subsection 6.4
The check was conducted on the basis of report No. ........................................................... dated ...............................................................,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Manufacturer ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Effective refrigerating capacity stated by manufacturer for an outside temperature of + 30 °C and an inside
temperature of:
0 °C ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ W
-10 °C .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. W
-20 °C .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. W
Refrigerant Charge:
Refrigerant fluid: (ISO/ASHRAE designation) a) ...........................................................................................................................................
Heating appliance:
Description .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manufacturer .................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type, serial number ...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of manufacture (month/year) .................................................................................................................................................................
Where situated .............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overall area of heat exchange surfaces ................................................................................................................................................ m2
Effective power rating as specified by manufacturer .................................................................................................................. kW
Description (number of appliances, etc.) .....................................................................................................................................................
Power of electric fans ......................................................................................................................................................................................... W
Delivery rate ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... m3/h
Dimensions of ducts: crosssection ............................................................... m2, length ..................................................................... m
a)
If existing
Condition of cooling appliance, heating appliance and inside ventilation appliances ...................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Running time .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. h
Check on operation of thermostat ....................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remarks: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
with ATP Annex 1, Appendix 3, valid for a period of not more than three years, with the distinguishing mark
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
MODEL No. 12
TEST REPORT
Prepared in conformity with the provisions of the Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable
Test Report No .......................................................................................
Determination of the effective refrigerating capacity of a refrigeration unit in accordance

with section 4 of ATP Annex 1, Appendix 2
Date of testing from DD/MM/YYYY to DD/MM/YYYY
Approved testing station .........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Name: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Address: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refrigeration unit presented by: .........................................................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(a) Technical specifications of the unit
Date of manufacture (month/year): .................................................................................................................................................................................

Make: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: ............................................................................................................... Serial No: ...............................................................................................................
Category 1 ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drive independent/dependent
Removable/not removable
Single unit/assembled components
Description: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Compressor: Make: ..................................................................... Type: ........................................................................
Number of cylinders: ................................... Cubic capacity: .................................................
Nominal speed of rotation: ........................................................................................................... rpm
Methods of drive 1: electric motor, separate internal combustion engine, vehicle engine, vehicle motion, other
Compressor drive motor: 1, 2
Electrical: Make: ..................................................................... Type: ........................................................................
Power: .......................................................... kW at .................................................................... rpm
Supply voltage ............................................. V Supply frequency .................................... Hz
Internal combustion engine: Make: ...................................................................... Type: ........................................................................
Number of cylinders: .................................... Cubic capacity: .................................................
Power: .......................................................... kW at .................................................................... rpm
Fuel: .........................................................................
Hydraulic motor: Make: ...................................................................... Type: ........................................................................
Method of drive: ..............................................
Alternator: Make: ...................................................................... Type: ........................................................................
Method of drive: .............................................. Other: .....................................................................
Speed of rotation: nominal speed given by the manufacturer:
.......................................................................................................................................................................... rpm
minimum speed: ................................................................................................................................. rpm
Refrigerant charge .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refrigerant fluid: (ISO/ASHRAE designation) a) ....................................................................................................................................................
Nominal mass of refrigerant .............................................................................................................................................................................................

Heat exchangers Condenser Evaporator

Make 2/
Type (if applicable) 2/
Number of tubes
Fin pitch (mm) 2/
Tube: nature and diameter (mm) 2/
Exchange surface area (m2) 2/
Frontal area (m2)
Number
Number of blades per fan
Diameter (mm)
FANS
Nominal power (W)2/,3/
Total nominal output at a pressure of

............................... Pa (m3/h)2/
Method of drive
Expansion valve: Make: ........................................................................................ Model: ....................................................................................
Adjustable: 1 ........................................................................ Not adjustable: 1 ..............................................................
Defrosting device: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatic device: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
a)
If existing
92
Results of measurements and refrigerating performance

(Mean temperature of the air to the inlet(s) of the refrigeration unit ............................................................................................. °C)
Speed of rotation Internal temperature

Power Fuel or Mean
Power Effective
absorbed by electrical temperature
of internal refrigerating
the unit power around Inlet to
Fans 3 Alternator 3 Compressor 3 fan heater Mean capacity
cooler fan 4 consumption the body evaporator
rpm rpm rpm W W W or l/hr °C °C °C W

................................... ................................... .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
Nominal
................................... ................................... .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. .................................. .................................. ................................. ................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
.................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. ................................. .................................. ................................. ................................. ................................. ................................. .................................
.................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
Minimal
................................... ................................... ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... ................................. ................................. .................................. ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
.................................. .................................. ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
................................... ................................... .................................. ................................. .................................. ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
.................................. .................................. ................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. .................................. ..................................
ATP Handbook 2021
(b) Test method and results:
Test method 1: heat balance method/enthalpy difference method
In a calorimeter box of mean surface area = ...................................................................................................................................... m2

measured value of the U-coefficient of a box
fitted with a refrigeration unit: ............................................................................................................................................... W/°C,
at a mean wall temperature of ..................................................................................................................................................... °C.
In an item of transport equipment:

measured value of the U-coefficient of an item of transport equipment fitted with a refrigeration
unit: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... W/°C,
at a mean wall temperature of ..................................................................................................................................................... °C.
Method employed for the correction of the U-coefficient of the body as a function of the mean wall temperature
of the body: .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maximum errors of determination of:

U-coefficient of the body ........................................................................................................................................................................................
refrigerating capacity of the unit ........................................................................................................................................................................
(c) Checks
Temperature regulator: Setting ........................................................... °C Differential ............................................................ °C
Functioning of the defrosting device 1: satisfactory/unsatisfactory
Air flow volume leaving the evaporator: value measured ............................................................ m3/h
at a static:
• differential pressure measured between the air flows leaving and entering the evaporator of 0 Pa,
• absolute barometric air pressure of ............................................................ hPa.
Existence of a means of supplying heat to the evaporator for setting the thermostat
between 0 and +12 °C 1: yes/no
(d) Remarks
According to the above test results, this report shall be valid as a certificate of type approval within the
meaning of ATP Annex 1, Appendix 1, paragraph 6 (a) only for a period of not more than six years, that is
until: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Date of test report: ........................................................................................ ..........................................................................................
Testing Officer
1
Delete where applicable.
2
Information indicated by the manufacturer.
3
Where applicable.
4
Enthalpy difference method only.
MODEL No. 13
TEST REPORT
Prepared in conformity with the special provisions of the Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable
Foodstuffs and on the Special Equipment to be used for such carriage (ATP)
Test Report No .......................................................................................
Determination of the effective refrigeration capacity of a refrigeration unit in accordance

with Annex 1, Appendix 2, section 9 of ATP
Tests carried out from mm/dd/yyyy to mm/dd/yyyy
Approved testing station
Name: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Address: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refrigerating unit presented by: .........................................................................................................................................................................................
(a) Technical specifications of the unit:
Make/Brand ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type designation: .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type of liquefied gas: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial number: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Date of manufacture (month/year):..................................................................................................................................................................................

(The tested unit shall not have been built more than 1 year prior to ATP tests.)
Description: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Regulating valve (if different types of fans are used repeat information below for each type)
Make/Brand .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial number: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tank (if different types of fans are used repeat information below for each type)
Make/Brand .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial number: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Capacity [l]: .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Gas pressure at tank outlet: ..................................................................................................................................................................................
Method of insulation: ...............................................................................................................................................................................................

Tank (if different types of fans are used repeat information below for each type) (cont’d)
Material of inner tank: ................................................................................................................................................................................................
Material of outer tank: ...............................................................................................................................................................................................
Supply of liquefied gas ............................................................................................................ ( internal pressure, pressure by heat

exchanger, pump)1
Pressure regulator
Make/Brand: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial number: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Gas pressure at pressure outlet: ..........................................................................................................................................................................
Supply liquefied gas line (on the test bench)
Diameter: ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Length: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Material: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Number of connections: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................
Defrosting device (Electric / Combustion unit) 1
Make/Brand: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supply: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Declared heating capacity: ....................................................................................................................................................................................
Regulator
Make/Brand: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware version: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software version: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial number: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power supply: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Possibility for Multi-temperature operation: (yes/no) 1
Number of compartments able to work in multi-temperatures:

HEAT EXCHANGERS Condenser Evaporator

Make-Type
Number of circuits
Number of rows
Number of blankets
Number of tubes
Fin pitch [mm]
Tube : nature and diameter [mm]2
Total exchange surface [m²]2
Face area [m²]
Make-Type
Number
Blade per fan
Diameter [mm]
FANS
Power [W]2
Nominal speed [rpm]2
Total nominal output airflow [m3/h]
at a pressure of 0 Pa2
Method of drive
(Description direct current / alternative,
frequency, etc.)
(b) Test method and results:

Test method1: Heat balance method/enthalpy difference method
In a calorimeter box of mean surface area of = ............................................................................................................................................... m2
Measured value of the U-value of the calorimeter box fitted with the
liquefied gas unit: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... W/°C
At a mean wall temperature: ......................................................................................................................................................................................... °C

In a transport equipment
Measured value of the U-value of the transport equipment fitted with the
liquefied gas unit: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... W/°C
At a mean wall temperature: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................°C

The formula employed for the correction of the U-value of the calorimeter box as a function of the mean wall
temperature is: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maximum errors of determination of:
U-value of the body: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refrigerating capacity of the liquefied gas unit: .....................................................................................................................................................
Mean air temperature at the tank outside: …………. °C

Electric power supply: ………………………………………………………………………………….
the liquid at the

Temperature of
Heating power
Pressure at the
consumption
consumption
Liquefied gas
temperature
temperature
temperature
refrigerating
evaporator
Evaporator
tank outlet
air intake
Electrical
capacity
External
Internal
Useful
[Vdc] and
[kg/h] [bar abs] [°C] [°C] [°C] [W] [°C] [W]
[A]
Corrected cooling capacity [W]:

(c) Checks:
Temperature regulator: Setting ............................................................................ °C
Differential ................................................................... °C
Functioning of the defrosting device1: satisfactory / unsatisfactory
Airflow volume leaving the evaporator:
Value measured: ............................................................................................................................................................................... m3/h
At a pressure of ....................................................................................................................................................................................... Pa
At a temperature of .............................................................................................................................................................................. °C
At a rotation speed of ............................................................................................................................................................... tr/min.
Minimum capacity tank: ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
(d) Remarks...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This test report is valid for a maximum duration of six years after the date of the end of the tests.
Done at: .......................................................................................................................
Testing Officer
1
Delete where applicable.
2
Information indicated by the manufacturer
MODEL No. 14
Declaration
MODEL of conformity for Multi Temperature – Multi compartment equipment
No. 14
SupplementaryDeclaration
documentoftoconformity for Multi Temperature – Multi compartment equipment
the Certificate of Compliance as per Annex 1, appendix 2 paragraph 7.3.6
Supplementary document to the Certificate of Compliance as per Annex 1, appendix 2 paragraph 7.3.6
Top view sketch of the lay-out of the equipment, indicating:
Top view sketch of the lay-out of the equipment, indicating:
– front and rear, numbering of compartments;
− front and rear, numbering of compartments;
– lay-out of
− the compartments
lay-out with fixedwith
of the compartments andfixed
movable bulkheads
and movable and the
bulkheads andfollowing dimensions
the following
dimensions
in centimeters: in centimeters:
inside dimensions ofinside dimensions
the body, of theand
thickness body, thickness
lengths and bulkheads;
of the lengths of the
bulkheads;
– most extreme position of movable dividing walls;
− most extreme position of movable dividing walls;
– Position of the host unit(s) and evaporators;
− Position of the host unit(s) and evaporators;
– material of the floor.
− material of the floor.
(Example of top view(Example

sketch) of top view sketch)
Compartment 1 Compartment 3
Compartment 2
Insulated body:
Insulated
ATP testbody:
report number: ...................................................................................................................................
ATP test report number: ......................................................................................
Make: ...................................................................................................................................
Make: ......................................................................................
SerialSerial number:
number: ......................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
Host unit:
Host unit:
ATP Test report number: ......................................................................................
ATP Test report number: ...................................................................................................................................
Make: ......................................................................................
Serial Number: ......................................................................................
Make: ...................................................................................................................................
Evaporators:
SerialATP
number:
test report number:...................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................
Make: ......................................................................................
Evaporators:
Type: ......................................................................................
ATP test report number: ...................................................................................................................................
- 109 -
Make: ...................................................................................................................................
Type: ...................................................................................................................................
Remarks:
(for example, limitations in compartment temperatures or dimensions, use of particular accessories as curtains etc.)
Authentication
Name of competent authority: .......................................................................................................................................................
Address: .......................................................................................................................................................
Telephone number: .......................................................................................................................................................
E-mail address: .......................................................................................................................................................
Date and Place of signature: ..................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stamps, signature, and name signing officer: ............................................................................................................................................................

9. PROCEDURE FOR MEASURING THE CAPACITY OF LIQUEFIED GAS

UNITS AND DIMENSIONING THE EQUIPMENT THAT USES THESE UNITS
9.1 Definitions
(a) A liquefied gas unit is composed of a tank containing liquefied gas, a regulating system, an
interconnection system, a muffler if applicable and one or more evaporator;
(b) Primary evaporator: any minimal structure comprising a liquefied gas unit intended to absorb
thermal capacity in an insulated compartment;
(c) Evaporator: any composition made up of primary evaporators located in an insulated compartment;
(d) Maximum nominal evaporator: any composition made up of primary evaporators located in one or
more insulated compartments;
(e) Mono-temperature liquefied gas unit: liquefied gas unit made up of a liquefied gas tank connected
to a single evaporator for regulating the temperature of a single insulated compartment;
(f) Multi-temperature liquefied gas unit: liquefied gas unit made up of a liquefied gas tank connected
to at least two evaporators, each regulating the temperature of a single, distinct insulated
compartment in the same multi-compartment equipment;
(g) Mono-temperature operation: operation of a mono- or multi-temperature liquefied gas unit in

which a single evaporator is activated and maintains a single compartment in mono-compartment
or multi-compartment equipment;
(h) Multi-temperature operation: operation of a multi-temperature liquefied gas unit with two or more
activated evaporators that maintain two different temperatures in insulated compartments in
multi-compartment equipment;
(i) Maximum nominal refrigerating capacity (Pmax-nom): the maximum specified refrigerating capacity
set by the manufacturer of the liquefied gas unit;
(j) Nominal installed refrigeration capacity (Pnom-ins): the maximum refrigeration capacity within
the maximum nominal refrigerating capacity that can be provided by a given configuration of
evaporators in a liquefied gas unit;
(k) Individual refrigerating capacity (Pind-evap): the maximum refrigerating capacity generated by each
evaporator when the liquefied gas unit is operating as a mono-temperature unit;
(l) Effective refrigerating capacity (Peff-frozen-evap ): the refrigerating capacity available to the lowest
temperature evaporator when the liquefied gas unit is operating as described in paragraph 9.2.4.
9.2 Test procedure for liquefied gas units
The test procedure shall be as specified in annex 1, appendix 2, section 4 of ATP, taking account of the
following particularities.
The tests shall be conducted for the different primary evaporators. Each primary evaporator shall be
tested on a separate calorimeter, if applicable, and placed in a temperature-controlled test cell.
For mono-temperature liquefied gas units, only the refrigeration capacity of the regulating unit with
the maximum nominal capacity evaporator will be measured. A third temperature level is added in
accordance with annex 1, appendix 2, paragraph 4 of ATP.
For multi-temperature liquefied gas units, the individual refrigerating capacity shall be measured for all
primary evaporators, each operating in mono-temperature mode as specified in paragraph 9.2.3.
ForFor
multi-temperature
For liquefied
multi-temperature
multi-temperature gasgas
liquefied
liquefied units,
gas the the
units,
units, individual
the refrigerating
individual
individual capacity
refrigerating
refrigerating shall
capacity
capacity be measured
shall
shall be measured
be measured
for for
all primary
all evaporators,
primary each
evaporators, operating
each in
operating mono-temperature
in mono-temperature mode
mode
for all primary evaporators, each operating in mono-temperature mode as specified as specified
as in in
specified in
paragraph
paragraph9.2.3.
9.2.3.
paragraph 9.2.3.
TheThe
refrigerating
The capacities
refrigerating
refrigerating capacities
capacities are are
determined
are determined
determined by by
using
by a liquefied
using
using gasgas
aa liquefied
liquefied tanktank
gas provided
tank provided
providedby by
the the
by the
manufacturer
manufacturer
manufacturerthat allows
that
that a
allows
allows complete
a
a test
complete
complete to
test
testbe
to
to carried
be
be out
carried
carried without
out
out intermediate
without
without refilling.
intermediate
intermediate refilling.
refilling.
The refrigerating capacities are determined by using a liquefied gas tank provided by the manufacturer
Allthat
All
All
allows
the the a complete
elements
the elements
elementsof the testliquefied
of the
of the to be gas
liquefied carried
liquefied gas
gas
out withoutunit
refrigeration intermediate
refrigeration
refrigeration shall
unit
unit shall
shall
refilling.
be placed
be placed
be in ain
placed inthermostatic enclosure
aa thermostatic
thermostatic enclosure
enclosure
maintained
maintained
maintainedat an
at
at ambient
an
an temperature
ambient
ambient temperature
temperatureof 30
of
of ±
30
300.5
±
± °C.
0.5
0.5 °C.
°C.
All the elements of the liquefied gas refrigeration unit shall be placed in a thermostatic enclosure
maintained at an ambient temperature of 30 ± 0.5 °C.
ForFor
eacheach
For test,test,
each the the
test, following
the shall
following
following alsoalso
shall
shall be recorded:
also be
be recorded:
recorded:
For each test, the following shall also be recorded:
TheThe
flow,
The temperature
flow,
flow, andand
temperature
temperature pressure
and of the
pressure
pressure of liquefied
of the
the gasgas
liquefied
liquefied emerging
gas from
emerging
emerging the the
from
from tanktank
the in use;
tank in
in use;
use;
The flow, temperature and pressure of the liquefied gas emerging from the tank in use;
TheThe
voltage,
The electrical
voltage,
voltage, current
electrical
electrical andand
current
current totaltotal
and electrical
total consumption
electrical
electrical absorbed
consumption
consumption by the
absorbed
absorbed by liquefied
by the
the gasgas
liquefied
liquefied gas
The voltage,
unitunit
(i.e. fan…); electrical current and total electrical consumption absorbed by the liquefied gas unit
unit (i.e.
(i.e. fan…);
fan…);
(i.e. fan…);
TheThe
gas
The flow
gas
Thegas
is equal
flow
gasflow is
flow is
to to
isequal
equal
equal the
to mean
tothe
the
the mass
mean
mean
mean
consumption
mass
mass
mass
of fluid
consumption
consumption
consumption of
of fluid
throughout
of fluid
fluid the the
throughout
throughout
throughout
test
the
the test
in question.
test
intest in question.
in question.
question.
Except when
Except
Except
Except determining
when
when
when determining
determining
determining the liquefied
the
thethe gas
liquefied
liquefied
liquefied flow,
gas
gas gas
flow, eacheach
flow,
flow,
each quantity
each quantity
quantity
quantity shall
shall be
shall
shall
be physically
be captured
be physically
physically
physically captured for a for
captured
captured
fixeda aa
for
for
fixed period
fixed
fixed
period equal
period
period
equal or to
lessor
equal
toequal to
to less
or
than than
or 10less
less 10 and
than
than
seconds seconds
10
10 seconds
secondsandand
each quantityeach
and quantity
each
each
shall shall
quantity
bequantity
recorded bea fixed
shall
shall
for recorded for for
be recorded
be recorded
maximum aperiod
forfixed
aa fixed
fixed
maximum
maximum
maximum
of period of 2of
period
period
2 minutes, subject minutes,
ofto2 minutes,
2the
minutes, subject
following: to the
subject
subject to following:
to the
the following:
following:
Each temperature
Each
Each
Each temperaturerecorded
temperature
temperature at the
recorded
recorded
recorded at air intake
at the
the air of of
intake
air intake
air intake the
of ventilated
the
ofthe
the evaporator
ventilated
ventilated
ventilatedevaporatorororeach
evaporator
evaporator or
each
or air
air temperature
each
each air
air temperature
temperature
recorded inside
recorded
recorded the
inside
inside body
the
the of
body
bodythe
of
of non-ventilated
the
the non-ventilated
non-ventilated evaporator shall
evaporator
evaporator comply
shall
shall with
comply
comply with the
recorded inside the body of the non-ventilated evaporator shall comply with the expected
with
the expected
the
expected class
class
class
expected class
temperature ±
temperature ±
temperature
temperature 1 °C.
±1
±1 °C.
1°C.
°C.
IfIfthe
If the
If
the electrical
the electrical
electrical
electrical
components
components
components
components ofofthe
thethe
of
of
liquefied
liquefied
the
gas
gasunit
liquefied
liquefied unitcan
gas
gas
becan
can
unit
unit
fedfed
be
can
by more
be
be fed
fed bythan
by more
by
onethan
than
more
more
electrical
oneone
than
power
electrical
one electrical
electrical
power supply,
power the
supply, tests
the the
supply, shall
the be
teststests repeated
shall
tests accordingly.
be repeated
shall be repeated
repeatedaccordingly.
accordingly.
power supply, shall be accordingly.
If the tests show equivalent maximum nominal refrigerating capacities, regardless of the operating
If the
If
Ifmodeteststests
the
the show
tests showequivalent
equivalentmaximum
maximum nominal refrigerating
nominal refrigeratingcapacities,
capacities,regardless
regardless of the
of
of the
operating of theshow
mode of the
equivalent
liquefiedliquefied
maximum
gas refrigeration
gas unit, nominal
then the
refrigeration
refrigerating
tests
unit, maythe
then
capacities,
be tests
restricted
may
regardless
tobea single electrical
restricted to
the
ato
operating
operating mode
mode of
of the
the liquefied
liquefied gas
gas refrigeration
refrigeration unit,
unit, then
then the
the tests
tests may
may be
be restricted
restricted a
singlepower supplypower
electrical mode,supply
taking mode,
into account
taking the potential
into account impact
the on the air
potential flow on
impact expelled
the the a
byflow
air
to
single
single electrical
electrical power supply mode,
power supplyEquivalence taking
mode, taking into account the potential impact on the
into accountif: the potential impact on the air flow air flow
evaporators,
expelled by the where applicable.
evaporators, where applicable.is demonstrated
Equivalence is demonstrated if: if:
expelled
expelled by
by the
the evaporators,
evaporators, where
where applicable.
applicable. Equivalence
Equivalence is
is demonstrated
demonstrated if:
| |
2 ∗ 22P∗∗nomP
P−nom
max−
nom
− P−
−,1max
max ,1 nomP
,1 − P−nom| |
max−
nom −,2max
max≤,2
,2 0,035
≤ 0,035
0,035
≤
PnomP P−nom + P+
max−,1max ,1 + P
nomP max−,2max ,2
−nom
nom − max ,1 nom − max ,2
Where:
Where:
Where:
Where:
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥,1
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 : The maximum
: The
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥,1 :: The

𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥,1 The maximum
maximum
maximumnominal capacity
nominal
nominal
nominal of
of the
capacity
capacity
capacity of
the liquefied
of the
the gasunit
liquefied
liquefied
liquefied gas unitfor
gas
gas fora for
unit
unit a aa electrical
for
given
given given
given
power electrical
supply power
electrical
electrical supply
power
power
mode, mode,
supply
supply mode,
mode,
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥,2
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 : The second
: The
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥,2 :: The
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥,2

maximum
second
second
The second
nominal
maximum
maximum
maximum
capacity
nominal
nominal
nominal
ofofthe
capacity
capacity
capacity of
of liquefied
thethe
the gasgas
liquefied
liquefied
liquefied
unitunit
gas gas
unitunit
for a different
for for a different
for
electrical aa different
different
power electrical
supplypower
electrical
electrical supply
power
power
mode. mode.
supply
supply mode.
mode.
9.2.2
9.2.2
9.2.2 Determination of the
Determination
Determination of maximum
of the
the nominal
maximum
maximum refrigerating
nominal
nominal capacity
refrigerating
refrigerating of the
capacity
capacity liquefied
of the
of the gasgas
liquefied
liquefied unitunit
gas unit
9.2.2 Determination of the maximum nominal refrigerating capacity of the liquefied gas unit
TheThe
testtest
The shall
test be conducted
shall
shall be at reference
be conducted
conducted temperatures
at reference
at reference of -20
temperatures
temperatures °C and
of -20
of -20 0 °C.
°C and
°C and 00 °C.
°C.
The test shall be conducted at reference temperatures of -20 °C and 0 °C.
TheThe
nominal
The
The nominal
nominal
nominal refrigerating capacity
refrigerating
refrigerating
refrigerating at at
-10-10
capacity
capacity
capacity at
°C °C °C
at shall
-10
-10 shall
°C
be be calculated
shall
shall be
calculated by linearby
be calculated
calculated linear
by
by interpolation
linear
linear
interpolation of the
interpolation
ofinterpolation
the capacitiesof
of the
at the
capacities at
capacities
capacities
-20 -20
at
°C and 0at °C
-20 and
°C 0
and°C.
0
°C.-20 °C and 0 °C.°C.
TheThe
maximum
The
The maximum
maximum
maximum nominal
nominal
nominal
nominal refrigerating capacity
refrigerating
refrigerating
refrigerating capacity capacity
capacityof of
the the
of regulating
the
of the regulating unitunit
regulating
regulating
unit in mono-temperature
unit in
in mono-temperature
in mono-temperaturemono-temperature
operation shall
operation shall
operation
operation
be be
shall
shall
measured measured
be measured
bethe
with measured with
maximum the
with
with maximum
the maximum
the maximum
nominal nominal
evaporatornominalevaporator
nominal offered
evaporator
offered evaporator by
offered the
by
offered by
by the manufacturer. manufacturer.
the manufacturer.
theevaporator
This manufacturer.
is
formed of the primary refrigeration evaporator(s).
- 112 - --
-- 112
112
The test shall be conducted with the unit operating at a single reference temperature, corresponding to
the temperature of the air intake in the case of ventilated evaporators or the temperature of the air inside
the body in the case of non-ventilated evaporators.
The maximum nominal refrigerating capacity shall be estimated at each level of temperature as follows:
A first test shall be carried out, for at least four hours, under control of the thermostat (of the
refrigeration unit) to stabilize the heat transfer between the interior and exterior of the calorimeter
box.
After re-filling of the tank (if needed), a second test shall be carried out for at least three hours for
the measurement of the maximum nominal refrigerating capacity in which:
(a) The set point of the liquefied gas unit shall be set to the chosen test temperature with a set
point shift if necessary, in accordance with the instructions of the test sponsor;
(b) The electrical power dissipated in the calorimeter box shall be adjusted throughout the test
to ensure that the reference temperature remains constant.
The refrigerating capacity drift during this second test shall be lower than a rolling average of 5% per
hour and shall not exceed 10% during the course of the test. If this is the case, the refrigeration capacity
obtained corresponds to the minimum refrigeration capacity recorded during the course of the test.
Only for the measurement of the maximum nominal refrigerating capacity of the liquefied gas unit, a
single additional test of one hour shall be conducted with the smallest tank sold with the unit to quantify
the impact of its volume on the regulation of the refrigerating capacity. The new refrigerating capacity
obtained shall not vary by more than 5% from the lower value or compared to the value found with the
tank used for the tests of three hours or more. Where the impact is greater, a restriction on the volume of
the tank shall be included in the official test report.
9.2.3 Determination of the individual refrigerating capacity of each primary evaporator of a

liquefied gas unit
The individual refrigerating capacity of each primary evaporator shall be measured in mono-temperature
operation. The test shall be conducted at -20 °C and 0 °C, as prescribed in paragraph 9.2.2.
The individual refrigerating capacity at -10 °C shall be calculated by linear interpolation of the capacities
at -20 °C and 0 °C.
9.2.4 Determination of the remaining effective refrigerating capacity of a liquefied gas unit in
multi-temperature operation at a reference heat load
Determination of the remaining effective capacity of a liquefied gas refrigeration unit requires the
simultaneous use of two or three evaporators, as follows:
(a) For a two-compartment unit, the evaporators with the highest and lowest individual refrigerating
capacities;
(b) For a unit with three or more compartments, the same evaporators as above and as many others as
needed, with intermediate refrigerating capacity.
Setting of the reference heat load:
(a) The set points of all but one of the evaporators shall be set in such a way as to obtain an air intake
temperature, or, if not applicable, an air temperature inside the body, of 0 °C;
(b) A heat load shall be applied to each calorimeter/ evaporator pair under control of the thermostat,
except the one not selected;
(c) The heat load shall be equal to 20% of the individual refrigerating capacity at -20 °C of each
evaporator.
The effective capacity of the remaining evaporator shall be determined at an air intake temperature, or, if
not applicable, an air temperature inside the body, of -20 °C.
Once the effective capacity of the remaining evaporator has been determined, the test shall be repeated
after conducting a circular permutation of the temperature classes.
9.3 Refrigerating capacity of evaporators

Refrigeration evaporators can be created on the basis of refrigeration capacity tests carried out on
primary evaporators. The refrigeration capacity and liquefied gas consumption of the evaporators equal
the arithmetic sum of the refrigeration capacity and of the liquefied gas consumption, respectively, of
the primary evaporators within the limit of the maximum nominal refrigerating capacity and of the
associated flow of liquefied gas.
9.4 Dimensioning and certification of refrigerated multi-temperature liquefied gas

equipment
The dimensioning and certification of refrigerated equipment using liquefied gas refrigeration units
shall be carried out as prescribed in section 3.2.6 for mono-temperature equipment, with the following
capacity equivalents:
Pnom-ins = Peff (effective refrigerating capacity)
or section 7.3 for multi-temperature refrigerating equipment, with the following capacity equivalents :
Pmax-nom = Pnominal
In addition, the usable volume of liquefied gas tanks shall be such as to permit the liquefied gas unit to
maintain the temperature for that class of equipment for a minimum of 12 hours.
Comment:
CONFORMITY ACCEPTANCE
Measurement results in all sections of Annex I, Appendix 2 should include estimation of
measurement uncertainty. To achieve demanded level of measurement uncertainty Test stations
should follow definition of procedures as defined by test procedure in each section of Annex I,
Appendix 2.
Conformity acceptance in all sections of Annex I, Appendix 2 should be done without taking
measurement uncertainty into account, using binary decision1 or shared risk1,2,3,4 decision rule.
Examples of conformity acceptance decisions for insulation box classification:
Case 1 – insulation box to be classified as IR:
All results for K factor which are smaller or equal to 0,40 conform with IR class (green points).
IR than
All results for K factor which are greater ... K0,40
≤ 0,40
do not conform with IR class (red points).
IR ... K ≤ 0,40
0,415
0,405
0,400
0,395
0,385
0,415
0,405
0,400
0,395
0,385
Case 2 – insulation box to be classified as IN:
All results for K factor which are smaller or equal to 0,70 conform with IN class (g
points).
All results for K factor results
All which
results for
areforKKfactor
factor
smaller which
which
or equal areare
to 0,70 greater than
smaller
conform 0,70
orIN
with do(green
equal
class not0,70
to conform with with
conform
points). IN class (red poi
IN class (g
points).
All results for K factor which are greater than 0,70 do not conform with IN class (red points).
All results for K IN ... Kwhich
factor ≤ 0,70
are greater than 0,70 do not conform with IN class (red poi
IN ... K ≤ 0,70
0,725
0,715
0,700
0,725
0,685 0,715
0,675
0,700
0,685
0,675
References:
1
ILAC- ILAC- Guidelines on the Reporting of Compliance with Specification G8:09/2019, - 2.7.
References:
2
J CGM 106 :2012 Evaluation of measurement data – The role of measurement uncertainty in conformity
1
assessment - 8.2. ILAC- ILAC- Guidelines on the Reporting of Compliance with Specification G8:09/20
3
Welmec 4.2-1 /2.7.
References:
2006 – 6.
4
OIML G 19 /2017
21 - 5.3.3, 5.3.4.
JCGM 106 :2012
ILAC- ILAC- Evaluation
Guidelines of measurement
on the Reporting of data – The role
Compliance of Specification
with measurement G8:09/20
uncertain
conformity assessment - 8.2.
2.7.
32
Welmec
JCGM 1064.2-1 / 2006
:2012 – 6.
Evaluation of measurement data – The role of measurement uncertain
conformity assessment - 8.2.
4
OIML G 19 /2017 - 5.3.3, 5.3.4.
Annex 1, Appendix 3
A. Model form of certificate of compliance of the equipment,
as prescribed in Annex 1, Appendix 1, paragraph 3
FORM OF CERTIFICATE FOR INSULATED, REFRIGERATED,

MECHANICALLY REFRIGERATED, HEATED OR MECHANICALLY
REFRIGERATED AND HEATED EQUIPMENT USED FOR THE
INTERNATIONAL CARRIAGE OF PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS
BY LAND
Certificates of compliance of equipment issued before 2 January 2011 in accordance with the requirements regarding
the model of the certificate in Annex 1, Appendix 3 in force until 1 January 2011 shall remain valid until their original
date of expiry.
Certificates of compliance issued before the date of entry into force of the modification to item 3 of the model
certificate (30 September 2015) shall remain valid until their original date of expiry.
/ EQUIPMENT 1
MECHANICALLY
2
XXXXXXXXX 3 MECHANICALLY MULTI-
INSULATED REFRIGERATED HEATED REFRIGERATED
REFRIGERATED TEMPERATURE 4
AND HEATED
/ CERTIFICATE 5 ATP XXXXXXXXX
/ Issued pursuant to the Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable

1. / Issuing authority: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

2. / Equipment 6: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
3. / Registration number : a
XXXXXXXXXX Vehicle identification number a XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
/ allotted by: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Insulated box: MAKE, MODEL, SERIAL
NUMBER, MONTH AND YEAR OF XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
MANUFACTURE 15
4. Owner or operated by: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
5. / Submitted by: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
6. / Is approved as: 7
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
6.1 / With one or more thermal appliances which is (are) 1:
6.1.1 / Independent; 8
MAKE, MODEL, REFRIGERANT, SERIAL NUMBER/YEAR OF MANUFACTURE (If any)
6.1.2 / Dependent ; 8 MAKE, MODEL, REFRIGERANT, SERIAL NUMBER/YEAR OF MANUFACTURE (If any)
6.1.3 / Removable;
6.1.4 / Not removable.
7. / Basis of issue of certificate:
7.1 / This certificate is issued on the basis of: 1
7.1.1 / Tests of the equipment;
7.1.2 / conformity with a reference item of equipment;
7.1.3 /A periodic inspection.
7.2 / Specify:
7.2.1 / The testing station: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7.2.2 The nature of the tests: 9
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7.2.3 / The number(s) of the report(s):
NNNNNNNN (TESTING STATION) YYYY/MM/DD and NNNNNNNN (TESTING STATION) YYYY/MM/DD
Nominal
7.2.4 / The K coefficient: 0.nn W/m2.°C 11
Evap.1 Evap.2 Evap.3
capacity
7.2.5 °C xxxxx W xxxxx W xxxxx W xxxxx W
The effective refrigerating capacity at an °C xxxxx W xxxxx W xxxxx W xxxxx W
outside temperature of 30 °C and an inside temperature of: 10 °C xxxxx W xxxxx W xxxxx W xxxxx W
7.3 / Number of openings and special equipment X

7.3.1 / Number of doors: X / rear door X / side door(s) X
7.3.2 / Number of vents: X
7.3.3 / Hanging meat equipment: X
7.4 / Others
8. / This certificate is valid until: MONTH & YEAR
8.1 / Provided that:
8.1.1 / The insulated body and,
where applicable, the thermal appliance is maintained in good condition; and
8.1.2 / No material alteration is made to the thermal
appliances;
9. / Done by: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CERTIFIED DUPLICATE 12
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Do not print this stamp on the original Certificate
(Officer name)
10. / On: YYYY/MM/DD
(Competent or authorized authority)
/ The competent authority

LOGOTYPE13 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
14
Security stamp (relief, / Responsible for the ATP

ultraviolet, etc.)
Original document (Officer name)
a / Not mandatory
- 117 -
These footnotes shall not be printed on the certificate itself.
The areas in grey shall be replaced by the translation in the language of the country issuing the ATP Certificate.
1
Strike out what does not apply.
2
Distinguishing sign of the country, as used in international road traffic.
3
The number (figures, letters, etc.) indicating the authority issuing the certificate and the approval reference.
4

The test procedure for new multi-temperature equipment appears in section 7 of annex 1, appendix 2. A test procedure
for in-service multi-temperature equipment has not yet been determined. Multi-temperature equipment is insulated
equipment with two or more compartments for different temperatures in each compartment.
5

The blank certificate shall be printed in the language of the issuing country and in English, French or Russian; the various
items shall be numbered as in the above model.
6

State type (wagon, lorry, trailer, semi-trailer, container, etc.); in the case of tank equipment for carriage of liquid foodstuffs,
add the word “tank”.
7

Enter here one or more of the descriptions listed in Appendix 4 of Annex 1, together with the corresponding distinguishing
mark or marks.
8
Write the make, model, refrigerant, serial number and year of manufacture of the equipment.
9
Measurement of the overall coefficient of heat transfer, determination of the efficiency of cooling appliances, etc.
10
Where determined in conformity with the provisions of Appendix 2, paragraph 3.2 of this Annex.
11
The effective cooling capacity of each evaporator depends on the number of evaporators fixed at the condensing unit.
12

In case of loss, a new Certificate can be provided or, instead of it, a photocopy of the ATP Certificate bearing a special
stamp with “CERTIFIED DUPLICATE” (in red ink) and the name of the certifying officer, his signature, and the name of the
competent authority or authorized body.
13
Security stamp (relief, fluorescent, ultraviolet, or other safety mark that certifies the origin of the certificate).
14
If applicable, mention the way the power for issuing ATP Certificates is delegated.
15

Write the mark, model, serial number of the manufacturer and month and year of manufacture of the insulated body.
All the serial numbers of insulated equipment (containers) having an internal volume of less than 2 m3 shall be listed.
It is also acceptable to collectively list these numbers, i.e. from number … to number.
Comment to item 8.1.2 in the model certificate of compliance:

The replacement of components of the thermal appliance does not constitute a material alteration, in as
much as replacement components do not reduce the quality of the appliance performance.
B. Certification plate of compliance of the equipment,

as provided for in Annex 1, Appendix 1, paragraph 3
1. The certification plate shall be affixed to the equipment permanently and in a clearly visible place adjacent
to any other approval plate issued for official purposes. The plate, conforming to the model reproduced
below, shall take the form of a rectangular, corrosion-resistant and fire-resistant plate measuring at least
160 mm by 100 mm. The following particulars shall be indicated legibly and indelibly on the plate in at
least the English or French or Russian language:
(a) The Latin letters “ATP” followed by the words “APPROVED FOR TRANSPORT OF PERISHABLE
FOODSTUFFS”;
(b) “APPROVAL NUMBER” followed by the distinguishing sign (in international road traffic) of the State
in which the approval was granted and the number (figures, letters, etc.) of the approval reference;
(c) “EQUIPMENT NUMBER” followed by the individual number assigned to identify the particular item
of equipment (which may be the manufacturer’s number);
(d) “ATP MARK” followed by the distinguishing mark prescribed in annex l, appendix 4, corresponding
to the class and the category of the equipment;
(e) “VALID UNTIL” followed by the date (month and year) when the approval of the unit of equipment
expires. If the approval is renewed following a test or inspection, the subsequent date of expiry may
be added on the same line.
2. The letters “ATP” and the letters of the distinguishing mark should be approximately 20 mm high. Other
letters and figures should not be less than 5 mm high.
Annex 1, Appendix 4
DISTINGUISHING MARKS TO BE AFFIXED TO SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
The distinguishing marks prescribed in appendix 1, paragraph 4 to this annex shall consist of capital Latin letters in
dark blue on a white ground. The height of the letters shall be at least 100 mm for the classification marks and at
least 50 mm for the expiry dates. For special equipment, such as a laden vehicle with maximum mass not exceeding
3.5 t, the height of the classification marks could likewise be 50 mm and at least 25 mm for the expiry dates.
The classification and expiry marks shall at least be affixed externally on both sides in the upper corners near the
front.
The marks shall be as follows:
Equipment Distinguishing mark
Normally insulated equipment IN
Heavily insulated equipment IR
Class A refrigerated equipment with normal insulation RNA
Class A refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation RRA
Class B refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation RRB
Class C refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation RRC
Class D refrigerated equipment with normal insulation RND
Class D refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation RRD
Class A mechanically refrigerated equipment with normal insulation FNA
Class A mechanically refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation FRA
Class B mechanically refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation FRB
Class C mechanically refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation FRC
Class D mechanically refrigerated equipment with normal insulation FND
Class D mechanically refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation FRD
Class E mechanically refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation FRE
Class F mechanically refrigerated equipment with heavy insulation FRF
Class A heated equipment with normal insulation CNA
Class A heated equipment with heavy insulation CRA
Class B heated equipment with heavy insulation CRB
Class C heated equipment with heavy insulation CRC
Class D heated equipment with heavy insulation CRD
Class A mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with normal insulation BNA
Equipment Distinguishing mark
Class A mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRA
Class B mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRB
Class C mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRC
Class D mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRD
Class E mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRE
Class F mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRF
Class G mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRG
Class H mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRH
Class I mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRI
Class J mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRJ
Class K mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRK
Class L mechanically refrigerated and heated equipment with heavy insulation BRL
In the case of multi-compartment road equipment divided in two compartments the equipment mark shall consist
in the distinguishing marks of each compartment (example: FRC-FRA) starting with the compartment located at the
front or on the left side of the equipment.
In the case of other multi-compartment equipment, the distinguishing mark shall be selected only for the highest ATP
class, i.e. the class that permits the highest difference between inside and outside temperatures, and supplemented
by the letter M (example: FRC-M).
This marking is mandatory for all equipment built from 1 October 2020.
If the equipment is fitted with a removable or dependent thermal appliance and if special conditions exist for
the use of the thermal appliance, the distinguishing mark or marks shall be supplemented by the letter X in the
following cases:
1. FOR REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT:

Where the eutectic plates have to be placed in another chamber for freezing;
2. FOR MECHANICALLY REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT AND MECHANICALLY REFRIGERATED AND HEATED
EQUIPMENT:
2.1 Where the compressor is powered by the vehicle engine;
2.2 Where the refrigeration or refrigeration-heating unit itself or a part is removable, which would
prevent its functioning.
The date (month, year) entered under section A, item 8 in appendix 3 of this annex as the date of expiry
of the certificate issued in respect of the equipment shall be quoted under the distinguishing mark or
marks aforesaid.
Model:
02 = month (February) ) of expiry of the

FRC
2020 = year ) certificate
02 2020
Annex 2
TO BE OBSERVED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF QUICK
(DEEP)-FROZEN AND FROZEN FOODSTUFFS
1. For the carriage of the following quick (deep)-frozen and frozen foodstuffs, the transport equipment has
to be selected and used in such a way that during carriage the highest temperature of the foodstuffs at
any point of the load does not exceed the indicated temperature.
By that means the equipment used for the transport of quick-frozen foodstuffs shall be fitted with the
device referred to in appendix 1 to this annex. If however one should proceed to the verification of the
temperature of the foodstuff, this shall be done according to the procedure laid down in appendix 2 to
this annex.
2. Accordingly, the temperature of the foodstuffs at any point in the load must be at or below the indicated
value on loading, during carriage and on unloading.
3. Where it is necessary to open the equipment, e.g. to carry out inspections, it is essential to ensure that the
foodstuffs are not exposed to procedures or conditions contrary to the objectives of this annex and those
of the International Convention on the Harmonization of Frontier Controls of Goods.
4. During certain operations, such as defrosting the evaporator of mechanically refrigerated equipment, a
brief rise of the temperature of the surface of the foodstuffs of not more than 3 °C in a part of the load,
e.g. near the evaporator, above the appropriate temperature may be permitted.
Ice cream............................................................................................................................................. -20 °C
Frozen or quick (deep)-frozen fish, fish products,

molluscs and crustaceans and all other
quick (deep)-frozen foodstuffs............................................................................................... -18 °C
All other frozen foodstuffs (except butter)...................................................................... -12 °C
Butter..................................................................................................................................................... -10 °C
Deep-frozen and frozen foodstuffs mentioned below to be immediately further processed at destination: 17
Butter
Concentrated fruit juice
1
The deep-frozen and frozen foodstuffs listed, when intended for immediate further processing at destination, may be permitted gradually to rise in
temperature during carriage so as to arrive at their destination at temperatures no higher than those specified by the sender and indicated in the
transport contract. This temperature should not be higher than the maximum temperature authorized for the same foodstuff when refrigerated as
mentioned in annex 3. The transport document shall state the name of the foodstuff, whether it is deep-frozen or frozen and that it is immediately to
be further processed at destination. This carriage shall be undertaken with ATP-approved equipment without use of a thermal appliance to increase
the temperature of the foodstuffs.
Annex 2, Appendix 1
MONITORING OF AIR TEMPERATURE FOR TRANSPORT OF
QUICK-FROZEN PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS
The transport equipment shall be fitted with an instrument capable of measuring and recording air temperatures
and storing the data obtained (hereinafter referred to as the instrument) to monitor the air temperatures to which
quick-frozen foodstuffs intended for human consumption are subjected.
The instrument shall be verified in accordance with EN 13486:2002 by an accredited body and the documentation
shall be available for the approval of ATP competent authorities.
The instrument shall comply with standard EN 12830:2018.
Temperature recorders in service that comply with EN 12830:1999 may continue to be used.
Temperature recordings obtained in this manner must be dated and stored by the operator for at least one year or
longer, according to the nature of the food.
Comments to Annex 2, Appendix 1:

1. The measuring instrument must measure air temperature in transport equipment with an accuracy of at
least ± 1 ° C.
2. The measuring instrument must allow for measuring air temperature and recording/logging the
measured value of the air temperature:
• At least once every 5 minutes if the duration of the journey does not exceed 24 hours;
• At least once every 15 minutes if the duration of the journey is between 24 hours and 7 days;
• At least once every 60 minutes if the duration of the journey exceeds 7 days.
3. The recording instrument should make it possible to determine whether the instrument or its components
for the measurement and recording and storage of the values of air temperatures have shut down during
the carriage of quick-frozen perishable foodstuffs. (ECE/TRANS/WP.11/222, para. 37).
4. Where it is possible, the measuring instrument should be placed inside the body of the transport
equipment in the area with the highest air temperature in accordance with the requirements of annex 2,
paragraph 2 of ATP:
• In the case of upper cold air distribution systems, near (to the left or right of) the bottom of the doorway
furthest away from the refrigeration unit;
• In the case of lower cold air distribution systems, in the middle of the portion above the doorway
furthest away from the refrigeration unit;
5. The instrument shall be adequately protected to avoid damage caused by moving parts of equipment
or contact with cargo items during loading and unloading or shifting or partial or complete collapse of
stacks of cargo during carriage.
No means of protection of the instruments (e.g. protective housing or placement of the measuring
instrument in a protective housing in a recess in a wall of the transport equipment, if any) should affect
the accuracy of the air temperature measurements inside the transport equipment.
(ECE/TRANS/WP.11/226, para. 46)
Annex 2, Appendix 2
PROCEDURE FOR THE SAMPLING AND MEASUREMENT
OF TEMPERATURE FOR CARRIAGE OF CHILLED, FROZEN
AND QUICK-FROZEN PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS
A. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. Inspection and measurement of temperatures stipulated in annexes 2 and 3 should be carried out so
that the foodstuffs are not exposed to conditions detrimental to the safety or quality of the foodstuffs.
Measuring of food temperatures should be carried out in a refrigerated environment, and with the
minimum delays and minimum disruption of transport operations.
2. Inspection and measurement procedures, as referred to in paragraph 1, shall preferably be carried out at
the point of loading or unloading. These procedures should not normally be carried out during transport,
unless serious doubt exists about the conformity of the temperatures of the foodstuffs stipulated in
annexes 2 and 3.
3. Where possible, the inspection should take account of information provided by temperature monitoring
devices during the journey before selecting those loads of perishable foodstuffs for sampling and
measurement procedures. Progression to temperature measurement of the food should only be
undertaken where there is reasonable doubt of the temperature control during carriage.
4. Where loads have been selected, a non-destructive measurement (betweencase or betweenpack)

should at first be used. Only where the results of the non-destructive measurement do not conform with
the temperatures laid down in annexes 2 or 3 (taking into account allowable tolerances), are destructive
measurements to be carried out. Where consignments or cases have been opened for inspection, but no
further action has been taken, they should be resealed giving the time, date, place of inspection, and the
official stamp of the inspection authority.
B. SAMPLING
5. The types of package selected for temperature measurement shall be such that their temperature is
representative of the warmest point of the consignment.
6. Where it is necessary to select samples during transport whilst the consignment is loaded, two samples
should be taken from the top and bottom of the consignment adjacent to the opening edge of each
door or pair of doors.
7. Where samples are taken during unloading of the consignment, four samples should be chosen from any
of the following locations:
– top and bottom of the consignment adjacent to the opening edge of the doors;
– top rear corners of the consignment (i.e. furthest away from the refrigeration unit);
– centre of the consignment;
– centre of the front surface of the consignment (i.e. closest to the refrigeration unit);
– top or bottom corners of the front surface of the consignment (i.e. closest to the return air intake of
the refrigeration unit).
8. In the case of chilled foods in annex 3, samples should also be taken from the coldest location to ensure
that freezing has not occurred during transportation.
C. TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT OF PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS

9. The temperature measuring probe should be precooled to as close to the product temperature as
possible before measurement.
I. Chilled foods
10.
Non-destructive measurement. Measurement between-case or between-pack should be made with
a probe with a flat head, which gives a good surface contact, low thermal mass, and high thermal
conductivity. When placing the probe between the cases or food packs, there should be sufficient
pressure to give a good thermal contact, and sufficient length of probe inserted to minimize conductivity
errors.
11.
Destructive measurement. A probe with a rigid, robust stem and sharpened point should be used, made
from a material which is easy to clean and disinfect. The probe should be inserted into the centre of the
food pack, and the temperature noted when a steady reading is reached.
II. Frozen and quick-frozen foods

12.
Non-destructive measurement. Same as paragraph 10.
13.
Destructive measurement. Temperature probes are not designed to penetrate frozen foods. Therefore, it
is necessary to make a hole in the product in which to insert the probe. The hole is made by a precooled
product penetration instrument, which is a sharp pointed metallic instrument such as an ice punch, hand
drill or an auger. The diameter of the hole should provide a close fit to that of the probe. The depth to
which the probe is inserted will depend on the type of product:
(i) Where product dimensions allow, insert the probe to a depth of 2.5 cm from the surface of the
product;
(ii) Where (i) is not possible because of the size of the product, the probe should be inserted to a
minimum depth from the surface of 3 to 4 times the diameter of the probe;
(iii) It is not possible or practical to make a hole in certain foods because of their size or composition
e.g. diced vegetables. In these cases, the internal temperature of the food package should be
determined by insertion of a suitable sharp-stemmed probe to the centre of the pack to measure
the temperature in contact with the food.
After inserting the probe, the temperature should be read when it has reached a steady value.
D. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE MEASURING SYSTEM

14. The measuring system (probe and read-out) used in determining temperature shall meet the following
specifications:
(i) the response time should achieve 90% of the difference between the initial and final reading within
three minutes;
(ii) the system must have an accuracy of ± 0.5 °C within the measurement range -20 °C to + 30 °C; 1
(iii) the measuring accuracy must not change by more than 0.3 °C during operation in the ambient
temperature range -20 °C to + 30 °C; 1
(iv) the display resolution of the instrument should be 0.1 °C;
(v) the accuracy of the system should be checked at regular intervals; 1
(vi) the system should have a current certificate of calibration from an approved institution;
1
The procedure will be defined.
(vii) the electrical components of the system should be protected against undesirable effects due to
condensation of moisture;
(viii) the system should be robust and shock proof.
E. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES IN THE MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE

15. Certain tolerances should be allowed in the interpretation of temperature measurements:
(i) operational - in the case of frozen and quick-frozen foods, a brief rise of up to 3 °C on the temperature
permitted in annex 2 is allowed for the surface temperature of the food;
(ii) methodology - non-destructive measurement can give up to a maximum of 2°C difference in the
reading compared to the true product temperature measurement, especially with the thickness
of cardboard in case packaging. This tolerance does not apply to the destructive measurement of
temperature.
Annex 3
TO BE OBSERVED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF CHILLED FOODSTUFFS
1. For the carriage of the following chilled foodstuffs, the transport equipment has to be selected and used
in such a way that during carriage the highest temperature of the foodstuffs at any point of the load does
not exceed the indicated temperature. If, however, the verification of the temperature of the foodstuff
is carried out, it shall be done according to the procedure laid down in Appendix 2 to Annex 2 to this
Agreement.
2. Accordingly, the temperature of the foodstuffs at any point in the load must not exceed the temperature
as indicated below on loading, during carriage and on unloading.
3. Where it is necessary to open the equipment, e.g. to carry out inspections, it is essential to ensure that
the foodstuffs are not exposed to procedures or conditions contrary to the objectives of this Annex and
those of the International Convention on the Harmonization of Frontier Controls of Goods.
4. The temperature control of foodstuffs specified in this Annex should be such as not to cause freezing at
any point of the load.
Maximumc temperature
I. Raw milk1 + 6 °C
II. Red meat2 and large game (other than red offal) + 7 °C
III. Meat products,3 pasteurized milk, butter, fresh dairy products Either at + 6 °C or at temperature
(yoghurt, kefir, cream and fresh cheese4), ready cooked foodstuffs indicated on the label and/or on the
(meat, fish, vegetables), ready to eat prepared raw vegetables and transport documents
vegetable products5, concentrated fruit juice and fish products3
not listed below
IV. Game (other than large game), poultry2 and rabbits + 4 °C
V. Red offal2 + 3 °C
VI. Minced meat2 Either at +2 °C or at temperature
indicated on the label and/or on the
transport documents
VII Untreated fish, molluscs and crustaceans 6 On melting ice or at temperature of
melting ice
1
When milk is collected from the farm for immediate processing, the temperature may rise during carriage to +10 °C.
2
Any preparations thereof.
3
Except for products fully treated by salting, smoking, drying or sterilization.
“Fresh cheese” means a non-ripened (non-matured) cheese which is ready for consumption shortly after manufacturing and which
4
has a limited conservation period.

Raw vegetables which have been diced, sliced or otherwise size reduced, but excluding those which have only been washed, peeled
5
or simply cut in half.

6
Except for live fish, live molluscs and live crustaceans.
ATP Examples of Good Practice (Not an official part of the ATP)

ATP Examples of Good Practice (Not an official part of the ATP)
- 134 -
Figure 1 Placement of devices for measuring air temperature inside and outside a tank with one
compartment
A B C
Front
Front view
view
A B C
Section A-A Section B-B Section C-C
The letters "i" and "e" in the numbers

of The letters “i”
the temperature and “e”
measuring in the
devices
indicate that the of
numbers devices
theare temperature
measuring devices
indicate that the devices
are respectively inside or
outside the tank.
Figure 1 Placement of devices for measuring air temperature inside and outside a tank with one
compartment.
Figure 2 Placement of devices for measuring air temperature inside and outside a tank with two
compartments
Section C-C
Section C-C Section D-D
Section D-D
A B C D
Front view
Front view
Compartment
Compartment 11 Compartment
Compartment 22
A B C D
Section A-A
Section A-A Section B-B
Section B-B
Note:
Note:
(1)
(1) Index “I”
“I” in
in the
the number
number ofofthe
thedevice
devicefor
measuring
for measuringair temperature designates
air temperature its
designates its
installation inside
installation insidethethetank,
tank,“e”
“e”––outside.
outside.
Figure 2 Placement of devices for measuring air temperature inside and outside a tank with two
compartments.
- 136 -
Figure 3 Placement of devices for measuring temperatures inside and outside tanks with three or
more compartments
Section C-C Section E-E
A B C D E F
Front view
Front Section F-F
Section A-A
Compartment 1
Compartment 1 Compart. 2 2
Compart. Compart. N-1N-1
Compart. Compartment
CompartmentN N
A B C D E F
Section B-B Section D-D
(1)1) The
Theletters"i"
letters”i” and
and "e" in “e” inofthe
the numbers the
numbers
temperature of the temperature
measuring devices indicate that the
measuring devices
devices are inside or outsideindicate
the tank. that
2) "N" is the number of compartments in the tank.
the devices are inside or outside
"4N" is the minimum number of devices for
the tank.
measuring the temperature in all the compartments of
(2)the tank
“N”. is the number of
compartments in the tank. “4N” is
the minimum number of devices
for measuring the temperature in
Figure 3 Placement of devices for measuring temperatures inside and outside tanks with three
all the compartments of theortank.
more compartments.
- 137 -
The Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable Foodstuffs and on the Special
ATP Handbook 2021
Equipment to be Used for such Carriage (ATP) done at Geneva on 1 September 1970 entered
into force on 21 November 1976.
The Agreement and its annexes have been regularly amended and updated since their entry
into force by the Working Party on the Transport of Perishable Foodstuffs (WP.11) of the
ATP
Economic Commission for Europe’s Inland Transport Committee.

At the time of publishing, the Contracting Parties to ATP are Albania, Andorra, Austria,
Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czechia, Denmark,
Estonia, Finland, France, Georgia, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Islamic Republic of Iran,
Italy, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Monaco, Montenegro, Morocco,
Netherlands, North Macedonia, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Republic of Moldova, Romania,
Russian Federation, San Marino, Saudi Arabia, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,
Tajikistan, Tunisia, Turkey, Ukraine, United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland,
United States of America, Uzbekistan.
ATP applies to transport operations performed on the territory of at least two of the above-
mentioned Contracting Parties. In addition, a number of countries have also adopted ATP as
the basis for their national legislation.
Information Service
United Nations Economic Commission for Europe
Palais des Nations

CH - 1211 Geneva 10, Switzerland ISBN 978-92-1-139205-0
Telephone: +41(0)22 917 12 34
E-mail: unece_info@un.org
Website: http://www.unece.org
Layout and Printing at United Nations, Geneva – 2114795 (E) – January 2022 – 311 – ECE/TRANS/312

ATP Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

ATP Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATP Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNITED NATIONS ECONOMIC COMMISSION FOR EUROPE

Inland Transport Committee

ATP ATP Handbook 2021

To be used with the Agreement on the International

United Nations Publications,

Sales No. E.21.VIII.4

UNITED NATIONS ECONOMIC COMMISSION

Additional practical information

This information, updated on a continuous basis, concerns:

– The status of ATP;

– Depositary notifications (e.g. new Contracting Parties, amendments or corrections to legal

– Publication details (corrections, publication of new amendments);

– List and details of competent authorities and ATP Test Stations.

AGREEMENT ON THE INTERNATIONAL CARRIAGE OF PERISHABLE FOODSTUFFS AND

Annex 1..................................................................................................................................................... 11

Annex 1, Appendix 1.............................................................................................................................. 14

Provisions relating to the checking of insulated, refrigerated, mechanically refrigerated,

Annex 1, Appendix 2.............................................................................................................................. 20

Models of test reports

MODEL No. 4 B....................................................................................................................................................................69

Annex 1, Appendix 3.............................................................................................................................. 106

Annex 1, Appendix 4.............................................................................................................................. 110

Distinguishing marks to be affixed to special equipment.......................................................................... 110

Annex 2..................................................................................................................................................... 112

SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS TO BE OBSERVED FOR THE

Annex 2, Appendix 1.............................................................................................................................. 113

Annex 2, Appendix 2.............................................................................................................................. 114

Procedure for the sampling and measurement of temperature for carriage

Annex 3..................................................................................................................................................... 117

SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS

AGREEMENT ON THE INTERNATIONAL CARRIAGE OF PERISHABLE

THE CONTRACTING PARTIES,

HAVE AGREED as follows:

SPECIAL TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT

USE OF SPECIAL TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT FOR THE INTERNATIONAL

– quick (deep)-frozen and frozen foodstuffs, and of

2. Number of detected breaches Equipment registered in foreign countries4

Number of breaches Number of breaches related

3. Percentage of defective equipment: ………………

Number of 2nd certificates issued: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

Number of 3rd certificates issued: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

Number of 4th certificates: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

Number of 5th and following certificates: (based on inspection by expert) or …………………………….

Total ATP certificates issued:

Signature of the competent authority

(a) by signing it;

(b) by ratifying it after signing it subject to ratification; or

(c) by acceding to it.

2. If a conference is convened in pursuance of paragraph 1 of this article, the Secretary-General shall so

(a) that it has an objection to the amendment proposed, or

(a) signatures, ratifications and accessions under article 9;

(c) denunciations under article 12;

(d) the termination of this Agreement under article 13;

(e) notifications received under articles 10 and 14;

At + 7 °C maximum in the case of class A;

At -10 °C maximum in the case of class B;

At -20 °C maximum in the case of class C; and

At 0 °C maximum in the case of class D.

be capable of being filled or refilled from the outside; and

Annex 1..................................................................................................................................................... 11

Annex 1, Appendix 1.............................................................................................................................. 14

Annex 1, Appendix 2.............................................................................................................................. 20

MODEL No. 4 B....................................................................................................................................................................69

Annex 1, Appendix 3.............................................................................................................................. 106

Annex 1, Appendix 4.............................................................................................................................. 110

Distinguishing marks to be affixed to special equipment.......................................................................... 110

Annex 2..................................................................................................................................................... 112

Annex 2, Appendix 1.............................................................................................................................. 113

Annex 2, Appendix 2.............................................................................................................................. 114

Annex 3..................................................................................................................................................... 117